* cris-tdep.c (cris_push_dummy_call): Support arguments passed by
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdbint.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*- texinfo -*-
2 @setfilename gdbint.info
3 @include gdb-cfg.texi
4 @dircategory Software development
5 @direntry
6 * Gdb-Internals: (gdbint). The GNU debugger's internals.
7 @end direntry
8
9 @ifinfo
10 This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
11 Copyright (C) 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
12 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
13 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14 Contributed by Cygnus Solutions. Written by John Gilmore.
15 Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
16
17 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
18 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
19 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
20 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
21 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
22 Free Documentation License''.
23 @end ifinfo
24
25 @setchapternewpage off
26 @settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
27
28 @syncodeindex fn cp
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @titlepage
32 @title @value{GDBN} Internals
33 @subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
34 @author John Gilmore
35 @author Cygnus Solutions
36 @author Second Edition:
37 @author Stan Shebs
38 @author Cygnus Solutions
39 @page
40 @tex
41 \def\$#1${{#1}} % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
42 \xdef\manvers{\$Revision$} % For use in headers, footers too
43 {\parskip=0pt
44 \hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
45 \hfill \manvers\par
46 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
47 }
48 @end tex
49
50 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
51 Copyright @copyright{} 1990,1991,1992,1993,1994,1996,1998,1999,2000,2001,
52 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
53
54 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
55 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
56 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
57 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
58 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
59 Free Documentation License''.
60 @end titlepage
61
62 @contents
63
64 @node Top
65 @c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
66 @c not for TeX). Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
67 @top Scope of this Document
68
69 This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}. It
70 includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
71 as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
72
73 @menu
74 * Requirements::
75 * Overall Structure::
76 * Algorithms::
77 * User Interface::
78 * libgdb::
79 * Symbol Handling::
80 * Language Support::
81 * Host Definition::
82 * Target Architecture Definition::
83 * Target Descriptions::
84 * Target Vector Definition::
85 * Native Debugging::
86 * Support Libraries::
87 * Coding::
88 * Porting GDB::
89 * Versions and Branches::
90 * Start of New Year Procedure::
91 * Releasing GDB::
92 * Testsuite::
93 * Hints::
94
95 * GDB Observers:: @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
96 * GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation
97 * Index::
98 @end menu
99
100 @node Requirements
101
102 @chapter Requirements
103 @cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
104
105 Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
106 requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}. Although some
107 of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
108 that have run counter to these requirements.
109
110 First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger. It's not designed to be a
111 front panel for embedded systems. It's not a text editor. It's not a
112 shell. It's not a programming environment.
113
114 @value{GDBN} is an interactive tool. Although a batch mode is
115 available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
116 programmer.
117
118 @value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user. A programmer hot on
119 the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
120 going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
121 to debugger commands.
122
123 @value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
124 While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
125 picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
126 programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
127 mollify the debugger.
128
129 @value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
130 Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
131 heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
132
133 @value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere. No other debugger is
134 available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
135 supports.
136
137
138 @node Overall Structure
139
140 @chapter Overall Structure
141
142 @value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
143 symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
144 @dfn{target side}).
145
146 The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
147 supporting code.
148
149 The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
150 interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
151 parsing, type and value printing.
152
153 The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
154 physical target manipulation.
155
156 The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
157 number of exceptions. For instance, core file support involves symbolic
158 elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
159 supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers). Instead,
160 this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
161 should fit together.
162
163 @section The Symbol Side
164
165 The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
166 you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
167 For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
168 many kinds of expressions.
169
170 @section The Target Side
171
172 The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
173 Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
174 of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
175 available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
176
177 Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
178 display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all. In some cases,
179 such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
180 relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
181 way.
182
183 @section Configurations
184
185 @cindex host
186 @cindex target
187 @dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
188 @dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
189 executes. In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
190 third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
191
192 Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host support.
193 Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte order, host
194 float format.
195
196 Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
197 dependent. Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
198 breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
199 to call a function.
200
201 Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
202 is native dependent. One example is Unix child process support; if the
203 host and target are not the same, doing a fork to start the target
204 process is a bad idea. The various macros needed for finding the
205 registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
206 in the native-dependent files.
207
208 Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
209 are really part of the target environment, but which require
210 @code{#include} files that are only available on the host system. Core
211 file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
212
213 When you want to make @value{GDBN} work ``native'' on a particular machine, you
214 have to include all three kinds of information.
215
216 @section Source Tree Structure
217 @cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
218
219 The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
220 are only a few subdirectories. A file's name usually gives a hint as
221 to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
222 @file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
223
224 Files that are related to some common task have names that share
225 common substrings. For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
226 debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
227 reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
228 deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
229 parlance for the program being debugged).
230
231 There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
232 @samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
233 files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
234 (sparc, mips, etc). Usually, only one of these will be used in a
235 specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
236
237 Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
238 debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
239 native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
240
241 The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
242
243 @table @file
244 @item cli
245 Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
246 Interpreter. @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
247
248 @item gdbserver
249 Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
250
251 @item gdbtk
252 Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
253
254 @item mi
255 The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
256
257 @item signals
258 Target signal translation code.
259
260 @item tui
261 Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
262 Interface. @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
263 @end table
264
265 @node Algorithms
266
267 @chapter Algorithms
268 @cindex algorithms
269
270 @value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms. They are
271 often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
272 cases and real-world issues. This chapter describes the basic
273 algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
274 they use.
275
276 @section Frames
277
278 @cindex frame
279 @cindex call stack frame
280 A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
281 and called functions.
282
283 @cindex frame, unwind
284 @value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
285 need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind. In fact,
286 the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
287 Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
288 read the @sc{dwarf} specification.
289
290 @findex frame_register_unwind
291 @findex get_frame_register
292 @value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
293 ``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame. That is,
294 @samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
295 frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
296 #0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame). But then the
297 obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
298 frame itself?
299
300 @cindex sentinel frame
301 @findex get_frame_type
302 @vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
303 To answer this question, GDB has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
304 ``-1st'' frame. Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
305 the current values of the youngest real frame's registers. If @var{f}
306 is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) ==
307 SENTINEL_FRAME}.
308
309 @section Prologue Analysis
310
311 @cindex prologue analysis
312 @cindex call frame information
313 @cindex CFI (call frame information)
314 To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
315 variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
316 of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
317 saved. Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
318 younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
319 scattered unpredictably across younger frames. This means that
320 changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
321 may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
322
323 Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
324 which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
325 But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
326 technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
327 registers. A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
328 code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
329 allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
330 register, save registers, and so on. Obviously, this can't be done
331 accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
332 helpful. Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
333 CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
334 @value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
335 calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
336
337 In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
338 target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
339 optimizers. Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
340 write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
341 understand all the prologues GCC would generate. However, over time
342 GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
343 understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
344 themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
345 and fragile. Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
346 instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
347
348 @cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
349 @cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
350 @cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
351 To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
352 and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
353 prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
354 analyzers. When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
355 framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
356 ``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
357 using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
358 would hold when the code actually runs. For example, if our function
359 starts with the instruction:
360
361 @example
362 addi r1, 42 # add 42 to r1
363 @end example
364 @noindent
365 we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
366 this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
367 value.
368
369 If we then see an instruction like:
370
371 @example
372 addi r1, 22 # add 22 to r1
373 @end example
374 @noindent
375 we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
376 it is now 64 greater than its original value.
377
378 If the next instruction were:
379
380 @example
381 mov r2, r1 # set r2 to r1's value
382 @end example
383 @noindent
384 then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
385 @code{r1} plus 64.
386
387 It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
388 need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
389 registers. So after an instruction like this:
390
391 @example
392 mov (fp+4), r2
393 @end example
394 @noindent
395 then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
396 holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
397
398 And so on.
399
400 Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable. If we
401 wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
402 the instruction:
403
404 @example
405 xor r1, r3 # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
406 @end example
407 @noindent
408 then things would get pretty complex. But remember, we're just doing
409 a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
410 relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
411 ``unknown''. We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
412 information is acceptable for our application.
413
414 So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
415 approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
416 never inaccurate.
417
418 Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
419 machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
420 contents of registers and memory instead of actual values. Starting
421 from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
422 current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
423 Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
424 kept track of.
425
426 @itemize @bullet
427
428 @item
429 To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
430 stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
431 minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
432 If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
433 the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
434 we don't know the frame size.
435
436 @item
437 To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
438 search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
439 registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
440 original value. If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
441 to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
442 anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
443 @end itemize
444
445 This does take some work. But prologue analyzers aren't
446 quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
447 forms any more; they're big, hairy functions. Along with inferior
448 function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
449 of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port. So it's
450 worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
451 and maintain. In the approach described above:
452
453 @itemize @bullet
454
455 @item
456 It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
457 whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
458 the effect of each instruction.
459
460 @item
461 It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
462 instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
463 wasn't already broken before.
464
465 @item
466 It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
467 complicate the code for each instruction. As long as your domain
468 of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
469 what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
470 already gathering the right data for you.
471
472 @end itemize
473
474 The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
475 the framework and how to use it.
476
477
478 @section Breakpoint Handling
479
480 @cindex breakpoints
481 In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
482 where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
483 that location.
484
485 There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
486 breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
487
488 @cindex hardware breakpoints
489 @cindex program counter
490 Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
491 features with some chips. Typically these work by having dedicated
492 register into which the breakpoint address may be stored. If the PC
493 (shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
494 ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
495 exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
496
497 Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
498 include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
499 processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
500 address.
501
502 A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
503 breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
504 software breakpoints. So although these are not literally ``hardware
505 breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
506 @value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
507 for something to happen.
508
509 Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
510 limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
511 start trying to set software breakpoints. (On some architectures,
512 notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
513 whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
514 breakpoints and watchpoints. On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
515 an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
516
517 @cindex software breakpoints
518 Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
519 The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
520 instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
521 that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
522 @value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program. When the
523 user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
524 instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
525
526 Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
527 must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM. It
528 can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
529 although such a situation would be highly unusual.
530
531 Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
532 instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
533 target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
534 breakpoint instruction. (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
535 larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
536 targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
537 instructions may jumped to.) Note that it's possible for an instruction
538 set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
539 although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
540 instruction.
541
542 @findex BREAKPOINT
543 The basic definition of the software breakpoint is the macro
544 @code{BREAKPOINT}.
545
546 Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}. However,
547 much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
548
549 @table @code
550 @cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
551 @findex target_remove_breakpoint
552 @findex target_insert_breakpoint
553 @item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
554 @itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
555 Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
556 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
557 non-zero for failure. On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
558 breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero. The fields of the
559 @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
560 to contain other information about the breakpoint on output. The field
561 @code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
562 related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
563 contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
564 if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
565 underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
566 memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
567 @code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
568 it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
569
570 For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
571 shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero. However,
572 the length reported by @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} is cached in
573 @code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
574 used to remove the breakpoint.
575
576 @cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
577 @findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
578 @findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
579 @item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
580 @itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
581 Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
582 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
583 non-zero for failure. See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
584 a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
585 @var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
586 @code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
587 but @code{placed_size} may be.
588 @end table
589
590 @section Single Stepping
591
592 @section Signal Handling
593
594 @section Thread Handling
595
596 @section Inferior Function Calls
597
598 @section Longjmp Support
599
600 @cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
601 @value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
602 @code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
603 stepping. This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
604 which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
605 command.
606
607 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
608 To make this work, you need to define a function called
609 @code{gdbarch_get_longjmp_target}, which will examine the @code{jmp_buf}
610 structure and extract the longjmp target address. Since @code{jmp_buf}
611 is target specific, you will need to define it in the appropriate
612 @file{tm-@var{target}.h} file. Look in @file{tm-sun4os4.h} and
613 @file{sparc-tdep.c} for examples of how to do this.
614
615 @section Watchpoints
616 @cindex watchpoints
617
618 Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
619 breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
620 instruction is executed. When you have data which changes without
621 your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
622 hunt down and kill such bugs.
623
624 @cindex hardware watchpoints
625 @cindex software watchpoints
626 Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
627 known as ``software watchpoints.'' @value{GDBN} always uses
628 hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
629 software watchpoints otherwise. Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
630 will use software watchpoints are:
631
632 @itemize @bullet
633 @item
634 The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
635 watchpoint support. For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
636 to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
637 more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
638 watchpoints.
639
640 @item
641 The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
642 registers (as opposed to memory).
643
644 @item
645 Too many different watchpoints requested. (On some architectures,
646 this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
647 resumed.) Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
648 breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
649 breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
650
651 @item
652 No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
653 implementation.
654 @end itemize
655
656 Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
657 single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
658 watched expression(s) after each instruction. The rest of this
659 section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
660
661 When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
662 possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
663 It first uses @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to see if any watchpoint
664 was hit. If not, all watchpoint checking is skipped.
665
666 Then @value{GDBN} calls @code{target_stopped_data_address} exactly
667 once. This method returns the address of the watchpoint which
668 triggered, if the target can determine it. If the triggered address
669 is available, @value{GDBN} compares the address returned by this
670 method with each watched memory address in each active watchpoint.
671 For data-read and data-access watchpoints, @value{GDBN} announces
672 every watchpoint that watches the triggered address as being hit.
673 For this reason, data-read and data-access watchpoints
674 @emph{require} that the triggered address be available; if not, read
675 and access watchpoints will never be considered hit. For data-write
676 watchpoints, if the triggered address is available, @value{GDBN}
677 considers only those watchpoints which match that address;
678 otherwise, @value{GDBN} considers all data-write watchpoints. For
679 each data-write watchpoint that @value{GDBN} considers, it evaluates
680 the expression whose value is being watched, and tests whether the
681 watched value has changed. Watchpoints whose watched values have
682 changed are announced as hit.
683
684 @value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
685 watchpoints:
686
687 @table @code
688 @findex TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
689 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
690 If defined, the target supports hardware watchpoints.
691
692 @findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
693 @item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
694 Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
695 possible to be set. The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
696 of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
697 not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
698 number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set. @var{other}
699 is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
700 are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
701 the same time).
702
703 @findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
704 @item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
705 Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
706 whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
707
708 @cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
709 @findex target_insert_watchpoint
710 @findex target_remove_watchpoint
711 @item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
712 @itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
713 Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
714 @var{len} bytes. @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
715 possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
716 defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
717
718 @smallexample
719 enum target_hw_bp_type
720 @{
721 hw_write = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
722 hw_read = 1, /* Read HW watchpoint */
723 hw_access = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
724 hw_execute = 3 /* Execute HW breakpoint */
725 @};
726 @end smallexample
727
728 @noindent
729 These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
730
731 @findex target_stopped_data_address
732 @item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
733 If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
734 associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
735 @var{addr_p} and return non-zero. Otherwise, return zero. This
736 is required for data-read and data-access watchpoints. It is
737 not required for data-write watchpoints, but @value{GDBN} uses
738 it to improve handling of those also.
739
740 @value{GDBN} will only call this method once per watchpoint stop,
741 immediately after calling @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}. If the
742 target's watchpoint indication is sticky, i.e., stays set after
743 resuming, this method should clear it. For instance, the x86 debug
744 control register has sticky triggered flags.
745
746 @findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
747 @item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
748 If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
749 watchpoint to step over it. Like @code{gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint},
750 this is usually set when watchpoints trigger at the instruction
751 which will perform an interesting read or write. It should be
752 set if there is a temporary disable bit which allows the processor
753 to step over the interesting instruction without raising the
754 watchpoint exception again.
755
756 @findex gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint
757 @item int gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint (@var{gdbarch})
758 If it returns a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
759 watchpoint to step the inferior over it. This is usually set when
760 watchpoints trigger at the instruction which will perform an
761 interesting read or write.
762
763 @findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
764 @item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
765 If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
766 inferior after a watchpoint has been hit. This is usually set
767 when watchpoints trigger at the instruction following an interesting
768 read or write.
769
770 @findex CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
771 @item CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
772 If this is defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} will remove all
773 watchpoints before stepping the inferior.
774
775 @findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
776 @item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
777 Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint. @var{wait_status} is of
778 the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
779 Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
780 the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
781 type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
782 target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
783 the @var{wait_status} argument.
784
785 @value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
786 @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
787 determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
788 it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
789 @end table
790
791 @subsection Watchpoints and Threads
792 @cindex watchpoints, with threads
793
794 @value{GDBN} only supports process-wide watchpoints, which trigger
795 in all threads. @value{GDBN} uses the thread ID to make watchpoints
796 act as if they were thread-specific, but it cannot set hardware
797 watchpoints that only trigger in a specific thread. Therefore, even
798 if the target supports threads, per-thread debug registers, and
799 watchpoints which only affect a single thread, it should set the
800 per-thread debug registers for all threads to the same value. On
801 @sc{gnu}/Linux native targets, this is accomplished by using
802 @code{ALL_LWPS} in @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and
803 @code{target_remove_watchpoint} and by using
804 @code{linux_set_new_thread} to register a handler for newly created
805 threads.
806
807 @value{GDBN}'s @sc{gnu}/Linux support only reports a single event
808 at a time, although multiple events can trigger simultaneously for
809 multi-threaded programs. When multiple events occur, @file{linux-nat.c}
810 queues subsequent events and returns them the next time the program
811 is resumed. This means that @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} and
812 @code{target_stopped_data_address} only need to consult the current
813 thread's state---the thread indicated by @code{inferior_ptid}. If
814 two threads have hit watchpoints simultaneously, those routines
815 will be called a second time for the second thread.
816
817 @subsection x86 Watchpoints
818 @cindex x86 debug registers
819 @cindex watchpoints, on x86
820
821 The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
822 registers designed to facilitate debugging. @value{GDBN} provides a
823 generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
824 support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints. This
825 subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
826
827 To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
828 following:
829
830 @itemize @bullet
831 @findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
832 @item
833 Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
834 target-dependent headers.
835
836 @item
837 Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
838 defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
839
840 @item
841 Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
842 @code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}) or
843 @code{TDEPFILES} (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition, TDEPFILES}).
844
845 @item
846 Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
847 below. Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
848 which does the real work.
849 @end itemize
850
851 The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
852 debug registers. Values are copied between the mirror images and the
853 real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
854 provide:
855
856 @table @code
857 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
858 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
859 Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
860
861 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
862 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
863 Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
864
865 @findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
866 @item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
867 Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
868 number @var{idx}.
869
870 @findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
871 @item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
872 Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register. This value is
873 used immediately after it is returned by
874 @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
875 register values.
876 @end table
877
878 For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
879 that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
880 to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints. This
881 allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
882 expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
883 wasting debug registers which are in short supply. @value{GDBN}
884 maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
885 anything to use this feature.
886
887 The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
888 bytes long. The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
889 be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
890 region on 4-byte boundary. However, the x86 watchpoint support in
891 @value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
892 bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
893 a single region. This allocation of several registers per a watched
894 region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
895
896 The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
897 @value{GDBN}'s application code:
898
899 @table @code
900 @findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
901 @item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
902 The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
903 this function. It counts the number of debug registers required to
904 watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
905 less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
906 processors.
907
908 @findex i386_stopped_data_address
909 @item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
910 The target function
911 @code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
912 This
913 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
914 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
915 macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
916 set in DR6.
917
918 @findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
919 @item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
920 The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
921 is set to call this function. The
922 argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored. This
923 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
924 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
925 macro, and returns true if any bit is set. Otherwise, false is
926 returned.
927
928 @findex i386_insert_watchpoint
929 @findex i386_remove_watchpoint
930 @item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
931 @itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
932 Insert or remove a watchpoint. The macros
933 @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
934 are set to call these functions. @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
935 looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
936 region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
937 reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
938 register sharing between watchpoints. If no such register is found,
939 the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
940 value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
941 register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
942 and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
943 inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
944 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If more than one debug register is
945 required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
946 each debug register.
947
948 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
949 in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
950 length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
951 values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
952 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If a register is shared by several
953 watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
954 decrements the reference count, and only calls
955 @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
956 the count goes to zero.
957
958 @findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
959 @findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
960 @item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
961 @itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
962 These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints. The
963 macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
964 @code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
965 The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
966 the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
967 These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
968 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
969 the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
970 hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
971 register.
972
973 @findex i386_stopped_by_hwbp
974 @item i386_stopped_by_hwbp (void)
975 This function returns non-zero if the inferior has some watchpoint or
976 hardware breakpoint that triggered. It works like
977 @code{i386_stopped_data_address}, except that it doesn't record the
978 address whose watchpoint triggered.
979
980 @findex i386_cleanup_dregs
981 @item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
982 This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
983 bits in the mirror images of the debug registers. It doesn't affect
984 the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
985 @end table
986
987 @noindent
988 @strong{Notes:}
989 @enumerate 1
990 @item
991 x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
992 However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
993 @code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
994 watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
995 on x86.
996
997 @item
998 x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
999 only, or globally, for all the tasks. For each debug register,
1000 there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
1001 whether the associated address is watched locally or globally. The
1002 current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
1003 always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
1004 watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
1005 unavailable in many platforms.
1006 @end enumerate
1007
1008 @section Checkpoints
1009 @cindex checkpoints
1010 @cindex restart
1011 In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
1012 the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
1013
1014 Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
1015 whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
1016 state at a later time. This can be expected to include the state of
1017 registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
1018 of open files and devices.
1019
1020 There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
1021 in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
1022 method implemented on the target side.
1023
1024 A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
1025 state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
1026 not typically include information about external entities such as
1027 open files. Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
1028
1029 A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
1030 as well as some subset of external (kernel) state. This method
1031 is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
1032 be used on other systems.
1033
1034 Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
1035 method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
1036 advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
1037 details of how it is done.
1038
1039
1040 @section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
1041 @cindex observer pattern interface
1042 @cindex notifications about changes in internals
1043
1044 In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
1045 some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals. Traditionally, these
1046 modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
1047 hooks and gdb-events. Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
1048 versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
1049 @value{GDBN}. The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
1050 a strong limitation.
1051
1052 A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1053 Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented. The goal was to provide
1054 a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1055 previously available. This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1056 easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1057 interface when adding new notifications.
1058
1059 See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1060 currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1061 implementation is also briefly discussed.
1062
1063 @node User Interface
1064
1065 @chapter User Interface
1066
1067 @value{GDBN} has several user interfaces. Although the command-line interface
1068 is the most common and most familiar, there are others.
1069
1070 @section Command Interpreter
1071
1072 @cindex command interpreter
1073 @cindex CLI
1074 The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple. It is designed to
1075 allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1076 has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1077 a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1078
1079 For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1080 @code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1081 to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1082
1083 @findex add_cmd
1084 @findex add_com
1085 To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}. @code{add_com} adds to
1086 the main command list, and should be used for those commands. The usual
1087 place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1088 the ends of most source files.
1089
1090 @findex add_setshow_cmd
1091 @findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1092 To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1093 @code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}. The former is
1094 a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1095 further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1096 the new command structures for manipulation.
1097
1098 @cindex deprecating commands
1099 @findex deprecate_cmd
1100 Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1101 deprecate them for some time. Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1102 aliases to set the deprecated flag. @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1103 @code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument. You can use the
1104 return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1105 command immediately after it is created.
1106
1107 The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1108 replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1109 @code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1110 entire string the user should type at the command line.
1111
1112 @section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1113 @c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1114 @c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1115
1116 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1117 The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1118 @value{GDBN} output code. They hide the specifics of different user
1119 interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1120 from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1121 every UI, to produce output.
1122
1123 @subsection Overview and Terminology
1124
1125 In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1126 of output, and can even generate an input request.
1127
1128 Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1129
1130 @itemize @bullet
1131 @item
1132 to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1133
1134 @item
1135 to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1136 operation;
1137
1138 @item
1139 to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1140 progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1141
1142 @item
1143 to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1144
1145 @item
1146 to show @emph{debug data};
1147
1148 @item
1149 to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1150 @end itemize
1151
1152 @noindent
1153 This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1154 although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1155
1156 Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1157 involves one or more of the following:
1158
1159 @itemize @bullet
1160 @item
1161 output of the actual data
1162
1163 @item
1164 formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1165 easily readable by humans
1166
1167 @item
1168 machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1169 parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1170
1171 @item
1172 annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1173 parts in the output
1174 @end itemize
1175
1176 The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1177 Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines. Note that use
1178 of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1179 deprecated.
1180
1181 Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1182 a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1183 non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1184 header and a body. In a BNF-like form:
1185
1186 @table @code
1187 @item <table> @expansion{}
1188 @code{<header> <body>}
1189 @item <header> @expansion{}
1190 @code{@{ <column> @}}
1191 @item <column> @expansion{}
1192 @code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1193 @item <body> @expansion{}
1194 @code{@{<row>@}}
1195 @end table
1196
1197
1198 @subsection General Conventions
1199
1200 Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1201 @code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1202 object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1203
1204 The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1205 to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1206
1207 The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1208 When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1209 sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1210 format.
1211
1212 When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1213 call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1214
1215
1216 @subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1217
1218 @cindex list output functions
1219 @cindex table output functions
1220 @cindex tuple output functions
1221 This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1222 tuples and tables. The routines to output the actual data items
1223 (fields) are presented in the next section.
1224
1225 To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1226 containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1227 fields where each field describes an identical object.
1228
1229 Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1230 rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading. Use this
1231 even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1232
1233 @cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1234 Tables can not be nested. Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1235 maximum of five levels.
1236
1237 The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1238
1239 @smallexample
1240 ui_out_table_begin
1241 ui_out_table_header
1242 @dots{}
1243 ui_out_table_body
1244 ui_out_tuple_begin
1245 ui_out_field_*
1246 @dots{}
1247 ui_out_tuple_end
1248 @dots{}
1249 ui_out_table_end
1250 @end smallexample
1251
1252 Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1253 functions:
1254
1255 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1256 The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1257 of a table. It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1258 function for a given table. @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1259 the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1260 @var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table. The string
1261 pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1262 @code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1263 was @code{malloc}ed.
1264
1265 The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1266 the end of the table's output.
1267 @end deftypefun
1268
1269 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1270 @code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1271 table column. You call this function several times, one each for every
1272 column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1273 @code{ui_out_table_body}.
1274
1275 The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters. The
1276 value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1277 @code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1278 center, or right-justify it. @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1279 specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1280 column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1281 call.
1282 @end deftypefun
1283
1284 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1285 This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1286 @end deftypefun
1287
1288 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1289 This function signals the end of a table's output. It should be called
1290 after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1291 functions.
1292
1293 There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1294 call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1295 will signal an internal error.
1296 @end deftypefun
1297
1298 The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1299 call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1300 @code{ui_out_table_end}. You build a tuple by calling
1301 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1302 calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1303
1304 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1305 This function marks the beginning of a tuple output. @var{id} points
1306 to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1307 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1308 after the call.
1309 @end deftypefun
1310
1311 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1312 This function signals an end of a tuple output. There should be exactly
1313 one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1314 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1315 be signaled.
1316 @end deftypefun
1317
1318 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1319 This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1320 (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups}) to close the tuple. It provides a convenient
1321 and correct implementation of the non-portable@footnote{The function
1322 cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1323 @smallexample
1324 struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1325 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1326 old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1327 uiout);
1328 @end smallexample
1329 @end deftypefun
1330
1331 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1332 This function marks the beginning of a list output. @var{id} points to
1333 an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1334 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1335 after the call.
1336 @end deftypefun
1337
1338 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1339 This function signals an end of a list output. There should be exactly
1340 one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1341 @code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1342 be signaled.
1343 @end deftypefun
1344
1345 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1346 Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1347 opens a list and then establishes cleanup (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups})
1348 that will close the list.
1349 @end deftypefun
1350
1351 @subsection Item Output Functions
1352
1353 @cindex item output functions
1354 @cindex field output functions
1355 @cindex data output
1356 The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1357 items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1358
1359 Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1360
1361 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1362 This is the most general output function. It produces the
1363 representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1364 according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1365 @code{printf}-like format string. The optional argument @var{fldname}
1366 supplies the name of the field. The data items themselves are
1367 supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1368
1369 This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1370 use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1371 @end deftypefun
1372
1373 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1374 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It uses the
1375 @code{"%d"} output conversion specification. @var{fldname} specifies
1376 the name of the field.
1377 @end deftypefun
1378
1379 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1380 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It differs from
1381 @code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1382 @var{fldname} specifies
1383 the name of the field.
1384 @end deftypefun
1385
1386 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1387 This function outputs an address.
1388 @end deftypefun
1389
1390 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1391 This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1392 specification.
1393 @end deftypefun
1394
1395 Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1396 functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1397 @code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}. These functions accept an argument of
1398 the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1399 used to store the data stream used for the output. When you use one
1400 of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1401 @code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions. To this end,
1402 you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1403 @code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1404 @code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1405 and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1406 constructed. When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1407 you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1408 @code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1409
1410 @deftypefun struct ui_stream *ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1411 This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1412 same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1413 passed in @var{uiout}. It returns a pointer to the newly created
1414 @code{ui_stream} object.
1415 @end deftypefun
1416
1417 @deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1418 This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1419 @var{streambuf}.
1420 @end deftypefun
1421
1422 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1423 This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1424 @code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1425 @code{ui_out_field_string} does. After a call to
1426 @code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1427 the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1428 @end deftypefun
1429
1430 @strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1431 out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1432 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1433 cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources. Here's a
1434 skeleton code to do that:
1435
1436 @smallexample
1437 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1438 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1439 ...
1440 do_cleanups (old);
1441 @end smallexample
1442
1443 If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1444 of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1445
1446 @smallexample
1447 mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1448 make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1449 @end smallexample
1450
1451 Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1452 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1453 same buffer twice.
1454
1455 @subsection Utility Output Functions
1456
1457 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1458 This function skips a field in a table. Use it if you have to leave
1459 an empty field without disrupting the table alignment. The argument
1460 @var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1461 @end deftypefun
1462
1463 @deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1464 This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1465 easy to be read by humans. For example, the console implementation of
1466 this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1467 from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1468
1469 Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1470 the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1471 to the table's format. Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1472 string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1473 output short messages.
1474 @end deftypefun
1475
1476 @deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1477 This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces. It is handy to align the
1478 text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1479 list.
1480 @end deftypefun
1481
1482 @deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1483 This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1484 verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}. The
1485 current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1486 verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1487 setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1488 as zero. So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1489 argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1490 @end deftypefun
1491
1492 @deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1493 This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1494 of where to break lines which are too long. Ignored for all other
1495 output consumers. @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1496 be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1497 accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1498 explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions. If
1499 @var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1500 @end deftypefun
1501
1502 @deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1503 This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1504 the UI buffers output.
1505 @end deftypefun
1506
1507
1508 @subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1509
1510 @cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1511 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1512 This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1513 functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1514 @value{GDBN}. The examples all come from functions defined on the
1515 @file{breakpoints.c} file.
1516
1517 This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1518 produce a table.
1519
1520 The original code was:
1521
1522 @smallexample
1523 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1524 @{
1525 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1526
1527 annotate_field (0);
1528 printf_filtered ("Num ");
1529 annotate_field (1);
1530 printf_filtered ("Type ");
1531 annotate_field (2);
1532 printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1533 annotate_field (3);
1534 printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1535 if (addressprint)
1536 @{
1537 annotate_field (4);
1538 printf_filtered ("Address ");
1539 @}
1540 annotate_field (5);
1541 printf_filtered ("What\n");
1542
1543 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1544 @}
1545 @end smallexample
1546
1547 Here's the new version:
1548
1549 @smallexample
1550 nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1551
1552 if (addressprint)
1553 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1554 else
1555 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1556
1557 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1558 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1559 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1560 annotate_field (0);
1561 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num"); /* 1 */
1562 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1563 annotate_field (1);
1564 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type"); /* 2 */
1565 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1566 annotate_field (2);
1567 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp"); /* 3 */
1568 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1569 annotate_field (3);
1570 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb"); /* 4 */
1571 if (addressprint)
1572 @{
1573 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1574 annotate_field (4);
1575 if (gdbarch_addr_bit (current_gdbarch) <= 32)
1576 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1577 else
1578 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1579 @}
1580 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1581 annotate_field (5);
1582 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What"); /* 6 */
1583 ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1584 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1585 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1586 @end smallexample
1587
1588 This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1589 to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1590 in the above example. The original code was:
1591
1592 @smallexample
1593 annotate_record ();
1594 annotate_field (0);
1595 printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1596 annotate_field (1);
1597 if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1598 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1599 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1600 (int)b->type);
1601 printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1602 annotate_field (2);
1603 printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1604 annotate_field (3);
1605 printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1606 @dots{}
1607 @end smallexample
1608
1609 This is the new version:
1610
1611 @smallexample
1612 annotate_record ();
1613 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1614 annotate_field (0);
1615 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1616 annotate_field (1);
1617 if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1618 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1619 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1620 (int) b->type);
1621 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1622 annotate_field (2);
1623 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1624 annotate_field (3);
1625 ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1626 @dots{}
1627 @end smallexample
1628
1629 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1630 produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1631 functions which requires a stream to be passed. It also shows how to
1632 automate stream destruction with cleanups. The original code was:
1633
1634 @smallexample
1635 annotate_field (5);
1636 print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1637 @end smallexample
1638
1639 The new version is:
1640
1641 @smallexample
1642 struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1643 struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1644 ...
1645 annotate_field (5);
1646 print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1647 ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1648 @end smallexample
1649
1650 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1651 @code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original code
1652 was:
1653
1654 @smallexample
1655 annotate_field (5);
1656 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1657 printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1658 else
1659 printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1660 @end smallexample
1661
1662 It became:
1663
1664 @smallexample
1665 annotate_field (5);
1666 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1667 @{
1668 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1669 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1670 @}
1671 else
1672 @{
1673 ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1674 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1675 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1676 @}
1677 @end smallexample
1678
1679 The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1680 use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}. The original
1681 code was:
1682
1683 @smallexample
1684 annotate_field (5);
1685 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1686 printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1687 @end smallexample
1688
1689 It became:
1690
1691 @smallexample
1692 annotate_field (5);
1693 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1694 @{
1695 ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1696 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1697 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1698 @}
1699 @end smallexample
1700
1701 Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original
1702 code was:
1703
1704 @smallexample
1705 annotate_field (5);
1706 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1707 printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1708 @end smallexample
1709
1710 It became:
1711
1712 @smallexample
1713 annotate_field (5);
1714 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1715 @{
1716 ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1717 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1718 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1719 @}
1720 @end smallexample
1721
1722 Finally, here's an example of printing an address. The original code:
1723
1724 @smallexample
1725 annotate_field (4);
1726 printf_filtered ("%s ",
1727 hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1728 @end smallexample
1729
1730 It became:
1731
1732 @smallexample
1733 annotate_field (4);
1734 ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1735 @end smallexample
1736
1737
1738 @section Console Printing
1739
1740 @section TUI
1741
1742 @node libgdb
1743
1744 @chapter libgdb
1745
1746 @section libgdb 1.0
1747 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1748 @code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago. The theory was
1749 to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1750
1751 @section libgdb 2.0
1752 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1753 @code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1754 better able to support graphical and other environments.
1755
1756 Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1757 evolving. The following components have so far been identified:
1758
1759 @itemize @bullet
1760 @item
1761 Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1762 @item
1763 Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1764 @item
1765 Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1766 @item
1767 Library - @file{gdb.h}
1768 @end itemize
1769
1770 The model that ties these components together is described below.
1771
1772 @section The @code{libgdb} Model
1773
1774 A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1775
1776 @itemize @bullet
1777 @item
1778 As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1779 @code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1780 state, etc).
1781 @item
1782 As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1783 obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1784 @end itemize
1785
1786 Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1787 the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1788 controlling @code{libgdb}. In particular, a client must ensure that
1789 @code{libgdb} is idle (i.e. no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1790 before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1791
1792 @section CLI support
1793
1794 At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1795 @code{libgdb}. Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1796 their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1797 requirements.
1798
1799 It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1800 (alternate between CLI and client query modes). The notes below sketch
1801 out the theory:
1802
1803 @itemize @bullet
1804 @item
1805 The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1806 @item
1807 The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1808 versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1809 @code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1810 @item
1811 The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1812 used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1813 @end itemize
1814
1815 When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1816 along. Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1817 the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1818 through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1819 At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1820 virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1821
1822 The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1823 @code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1824 client's custom builder).
1825
1826 @section @code{libgdb} components
1827
1828 @subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1829 @file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1830 be used to implement an observer. At present it only allows for one
1831 observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1832 the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1833 finished the current command.
1834
1835 @subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1836 @file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1837 create a builder. That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1838 when doing any queries.
1839
1840 @subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1841 @c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1842 @file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1843 loop. A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1844 implement a new event-loop that GDB would use.
1845
1846 The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant. This is so that
1847 @value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1848 instead of returning.
1849
1850 @subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1851 @file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system. It provides
1852 the query interface. Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1853 builder. The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1854 before the query function returns.
1855
1856 @node Symbol Handling
1857
1858 @chapter Symbol Handling
1859
1860 Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation. Symbols include variables,
1861 functions, and types.
1862
1863 @section Symbol Reading
1864
1865 @cindex symbol reading
1866 @cindex reading of symbols
1867 @cindex symbol files
1868 @value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}. The usual symbol
1869 file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
1870 debugging. @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
1871 symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
1872 more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands, or while
1873 reading symbols from shared libraries.
1874
1875 @findex find_sym_fns
1876 Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
1877 the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}). BFD identifies the type
1878 of the file by examining its header. @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
1879 this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
1880
1881 @findex add_symtab_fns
1882 @cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
1883 @cindex adding a symbol-reading module
1884 Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
1885 @code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization. The argument
1886 to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
1887 name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
1888 and pointers to four functions. These functions are called at various
1889 times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
1890 prefix.
1891
1892 The functions supplied by each module are:
1893
1894 @table @code
1895 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
1896
1897 @cindex secondary symbol file
1898 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
1899 symbol file. This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
1900 resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
1901 read a new symbol file. Note that the symbol file which we are reading
1902 might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
1903 whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
1904
1905 The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
1906 @code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
1907 new symbol file being read. Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
1908 and can be modified as desired. Typically, a struct of private
1909 information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
1910 in the @code{private} field.
1911
1912 There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
1913 @code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
1914
1915 @item @var{xyz}_new_init()
1916
1917 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
1918 This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
1919 state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
1920 @value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}. It has no
1921 arguments and no result. It may be called after
1922 @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
1923 may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
1924
1925 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
1926
1927 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
1928 symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
1929
1930 @code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
1931 @code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization. @code{addr} is
1932 the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
1933 address in memory. @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
1934 table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
1935 or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
1936 @end table
1937
1938 In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
1939 @var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
1940 to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
1941 from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
1942
1943 @table @code
1944 @item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
1945
1946 Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
1947 the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
1948 pointer set. The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
1949 symtab. Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
1950 @code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
1951 zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
1952 @end table
1953
1954 @section Partial Symbol Tables
1955
1956 @value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
1957
1958 @itemize @bullet
1959 @cindex full symbol table
1960 @cindex symtabs
1961 @item
1962 Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}). These contain the main
1963 information about symbols and addresses.
1964
1965 @cindex psymtabs
1966 @item
1967 Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}). These contain enough
1968 information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
1969 symbol table.
1970
1971 @cindex minimal symbol table
1972 @cindex minsymtabs
1973 @item
1974 Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}). These contain information
1975 gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
1976 @end itemize
1977
1978 @cindex partial symbol table
1979 This section describes partial symbol tables.
1980
1981 A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
1982 file's debugging information. Small amounts of information are
1983 extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
1984 need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
1985 information. The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
1986 quickly. Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
1987 pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
1988 the user.
1989 @c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
1990
1991 The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
1992 visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
1993 that file. These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
1994 types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
1995
1996 The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
1997 full symbol table would represent.
1998
1999 @cindex finding a symbol
2000 @cindex symbol lookup
2001 The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
2002 code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
2003
2004 @itemize @bullet
2005 @findex find_pc_function
2006 @findex find_pc_line
2007 @item
2008 By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
2009 function in this file). The address will be noticed to be in the
2010 range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
2011 @code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
2012 @code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
2013
2014 @cindex lookup_symbol
2015 @item
2016 By its name
2017 (e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
2018 function). Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
2019 psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in. Local names will
2020 have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
2021 case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
2022 qualifier. Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
2023 local scope, in which case the first case applies. @code{lookup_symbol}
2024 does most of the work here.
2025 @end itemize
2026
2027 The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
2028 at the right moment. Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
2029 while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it. Since
2030 psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
2031 them anyway. Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
2032 either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
2033 name.
2034
2035 It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
2036 been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
2037 in. Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
2038 all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
2039 ranges.
2040
2041 The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
2042 thrown away after the symtab has been read in. The symtab should always
2043 be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
2044 bug-free environment). Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
2045 and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
2046 on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
2047 unless you want to do a lot more work.
2048
2049 @section Types
2050
2051 @unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2052
2053 @cindex fundamental types
2054 These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally. Fundamental
2055 types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2056 into one of these. They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2057 that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2058 knows about.
2059
2060 @unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2061
2062 @cindex type codes
2063 Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2064 of these types. The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2065 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2066 which is a pointer to another type. Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2067 types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2068 other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2069 or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2070
2071 @unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2072
2073 These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2074 fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2075 use for various ugly historical reasons. We eventually want to
2076 eliminate these. Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2077 initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2078 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2079 an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type. The difference is that the
2080 @code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2081 only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2082 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2083 some particular objfile.
2084
2085 @section Object File Formats
2086 @cindex object file formats
2087
2088 @subsection a.out
2089
2090 @cindex @code{a.out} format
2091 The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix. It
2092 consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2093 which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2094 respectively.
2095
2096 The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2097 place for debugging information. (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2098 @samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!) The only debugging
2099 format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2100 symbols with distinctive attributes.
2101
2102 The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2103
2104 @subsection COFF
2105
2106 @cindex COFF format
2107 The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2108 COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header. The
2109 number of sections is limited.
2110
2111 The COFF specification includes support for debugging. Although this
2112 was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited. For
2113 instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2114 included file.
2115
2116 The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2117
2118 @subsection ECOFF
2119
2120 @cindex ECOFF format
2121 ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2122 workstations.
2123
2124 The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2125
2126 @subsection XCOFF
2127
2128 @cindex XCOFF format
2129 The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2130 The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2131 symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2132 @code{.debug} section (rather than the string table). For more
2133 information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2134
2135 The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2136 shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2137 refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2138 relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable. At least
2139 using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2140 been run (or the core file has been read).
2141
2142 @subsection PE
2143
2144 @cindex PE-COFF format
2145 Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2146 executables. PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2147
2148 While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2149 COFF reader.
2150
2151 @subsection ELF
2152
2153 @cindex ELF format
2154 The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix. ELF is similar
2155 to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it removes
2156 many of COFF's limitations.
2157
2158 The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2159
2160 @subsection SOM
2161
2162 @cindex SOM format
2163 SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2164 SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2165
2166 The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2167
2168 @section Debugging File Formats
2169
2170 This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2171 are independent of the object file format.
2172
2173 @subsection stabs
2174
2175 @cindex stabs debugging info
2176 @code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2177 format. Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2178 formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2179
2180 While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2181 including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2182 the real work.
2183
2184 @subsection COFF
2185
2186 @cindex COFF debugging info
2187 The basic COFF definition includes debugging information. The level
2188 of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2189
2190 @subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2191
2192 @cindex ECOFF debugging info
2193 ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2194
2195 The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2196
2197 @subsection DWARF 2
2198
2199 @cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2200 DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2201
2202 The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2203
2204 @subsection SOM
2205
2206 @cindex SOM debugging info
2207 Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2208
2209 @section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2210
2211 @cindex adding debugging info reader
2212 If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2213 there is probably little to be done.
2214
2215 If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2216 BFD. This is beyond the scope of this document.
2217
2218 You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2219 debugging symbols. Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping routines
2220 from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the debugging
2221 information. As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not depend on the BFD
2222 internal data structures.
2223
2224 For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2225 to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2226 platforms have different sizes and layouts. Specialized routines that
2227 will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2228 directly. This interface should be described in a file
2229 @file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2230
2231 @section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2232
2233 Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2234 its @code{objfile_obstack}. This includes symbols, types,
2235 namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2236
2237 Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2238 released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded. Therefore one
2239 objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2240 they could be unloaded at different times.
2241
2242 User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types. Normally
2243 these types live in the associated objfile. However, when the objfile
2244 is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2245 the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2246
2247
2248 @node Language Support
2249
2250 @chapter Language Support
2251
2252 @cindex language support
2253 @value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2254 although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2255 manually.
2256
2257 @value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2258 of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2259 means Fortran, etc. It may also use a special-purpose language
2260 identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2261
2262 @section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2263
2264 @cindex adding source language
2265 To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2266 following steps:
2267
2268 @table @emph
2269 @item Create the expression parser.
2270
2271 @cindex expression parser
2272 This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}. Routines for
2273 building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2274 @file{parse.c}.
2275
2276 @cindex language parser
2277 Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2278 parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2279 @strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2280 various parsers from defining the same global names:
2281
2282 @smallexample
2283 #define yyparse @var{lang}_parse
2284 #define yylex @var{lang}_lex
2285 #define yyerror @var{lang}_error
2286 #define yylval @var{lang}_lval
2287 #define yychar @var{lang}_char
2288 #define yydebug @var{lang}_debug
2289 #define yypact @var{lang}_pact
2290 #define yyr1 @var{lang}_r1
2291 #define yyr2 @var{lang}_r2
2292 #define yydef @var{lang}_def
2293 #define yychk @var{lang}_chk
2294 #define yypgo @var{lang}_pgo
2295 #define yyact @var{lang}_act
2296 #define yyexca @var{lang}_exca
2297 #define yyerrflag @var{lang}_errflag
2298 #define yynerrs @var{lang}_nerrs
2299 @end smallexample
2300
2301 At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2302 initialize it with the right values for your language. Define an
2303 @code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2304 @samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2305 that your language exists. You'll need some other supporting variables
2306 and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2307 @code{@var{lang}_language_defn}. See the declaration of @code{struct
2308 language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2309 for more information.
2310
2311 @item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2312
2313 @cindex expression evaluation routines
2314 @findex evaluate_subexp
2315 @findex prefixify_subexp
2316 @findex length_of_subexp
2317 If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2318 add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}. Add support
2319 code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2320 defined in the file @file{eval.c}. Add cases
2321 for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2322 @code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}. These compute
2323 the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2324
2325 @item Update some existing code
2326
2327 Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2328 @code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2329
2330 Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2331 These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2332 are language dependent. If your language does not appear in the switch
2333 statement, an error is reported.
2334
2335 @vindex current_language
2336 Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2337 @code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2338 @code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2339 string.
2340
2341 @findex _initialize_language
2342 Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2343 language. This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2344 dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2345
2346 @findex allocate_symtab
2347 Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2348 code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2349 This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2350 Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2351 file. If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2352 information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2353 code.
2354
2355 @findex print_subexp
2356 @findex op_print_tab
2357 Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2358 expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}. Also, add the
2359 printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2360
2361 @item Add a place of call
2362
2363 @findex parse_exp_1
2364 Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2365 @code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2366
2367 @item Use macros to trim code
2368
2369 @cindex trimming language-dependent code
2370 The user has the option of building @value{GDBN} for some or all of the
2371 languages. If the user decides to build @value{GDBN} for the language
2372 @var{lang}, then every file dependent on @file{language.h} will have the
2373 macro @code{_LANG_@var{lang}} defined in it. Use @code{#ifdef}s to
2374 leave out large routines that the user won't need if he or she is not
2375 using your language.
2376
2377 Note that you do not need to do this in your YACC parser, since if @value{GDBN}
2378 is not build for @var{lang}, then @file{@var{lang}-exp.tab.o} (the
2379 compiled form of your parser) is not linked into @value{GDBN} at all.
2380
2381 See the file @file{configure.in} for how @value{GDBN} is configured
2382 for different languages.
2383
2384 @item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2385
2386 Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}. Make sure you update the macro
2387 variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2388 not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2389 distribution!
2390 @end table
2391
2392
2393 @node Host Definition
2394
2395 @chapter Host Definition
2396
2397 With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2398 definition machinery anymore. The following information is provided,
2399 mainly, as an historical reference.
2400
2401 @section Adding a New Host
2402
2403 @cindex adding a new host
2404 @cindex host, adding
2405 @value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2406 New host-specific definitions should not be needed. Older hosts
2407 @value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2408 below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2409 eventually disappear.
2410
2411 @table @file
2412 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2413 This file once contained both host and native configuration information
2414 (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the machine @var{xyz}. The host
2415 configuration information is now handed by Autoconf.
2416
2417 Host configuration information included a definition of
2418 @code{XM_FILE=xm-@var{xyz}.h} and possibly definitions for @code{CC},
2419 @code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2420 @code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2421
2422 New host only configurations do not need this file.
2423
2424 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h
2425 This file once contained definitions and includes required when hosting
2426 gdb on machine @var{xyz}. Those definitions and includes are now
2427 handled by Autoconf.
2428
2429 New host and native configurations do not need this file.
2430
2431 @emph{Maintainer's note: Some hosts continue to use the @file{xm-xyz.h}
2432 file to define the macros @var{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT},
2433 @var{HOST_DOUBLE_FORMAT} and @var{HOST_LONG_DOUBLE_FORMAT}. That code
2434 also needs to be replaced with either an Autoconf or run-time test.}
2435
2436 @end table
2437
2438 @subheading Generic Host Support Files
2439
2440 @cindex generic host support
2441 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2442 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
2443 defined in your @file{xm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
2444 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
2445 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{XDEPFILES}.
2446
2447 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
2448 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
2449 Put them into @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.c}, and put @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.o}
2450 into @code{XDEPFILES}.
2451
2452 @table @file
2453 @cindex remote debugging support
2454 @cindex serial line support
2455 @item ser-unix.c
2456 This contains serial line support for Unix systems. This is always
2457 included, via the makefile variable @code{SER_HARDWIRE}; override this
2458 variable in the @file{.mh} file to avoid it.
2459
2460 @item ser-go32.c
2461 This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2462 using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2463
2464 @cindex TCP remote support
2465 @item ser-tcp.c
2466 This contains generic TCP support using sockets.
2467 @end table
2468
2469 @section Host Conditionals
2470
2471 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2472 defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2473 attributes of the host system. These macros and their meanings (or if
2474 the meaning is not documented here, then one of the source files where
2475 they are used is indicated) are:
2476
2477 @ftable @code
2478 @item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2479 The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2480 @file{.gdbinit}).
2481
2482 @item NO_STD_REGS
2483 This macro is deprecated.
2484
2485 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2486 If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2487 of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2488
2489 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2490 Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2491 the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2492
2493 @item ALIGN_STACK_ON_STARTUP
2494 @cindex stack alignment
2495 Define this if your system is of a sort that will crash in
2496 @code{tgetent} if the stack happens not to be longword-aligned when
2497 @code{main} is called. This is a rare situation, but is known to occur
2498 on several different types of systems.
2499
2500 @item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2501 @cindex DOS text files
2502 Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2503 line terminator. This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2504 characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2505 which are ``sourced'' by gdb. It must be possible to open files in binary
2506 mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2507
2508 @item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2509 @cindex prompt
2510 The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2511
2512 @item DEV_TTY
2513 @cindex terminal device
2514 The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2515
2516 @item FOPEN_RB
2517 Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2518
2519 @item HAVE_MMAP
2520 @findex mmap
2521 In some cases, use the system call @code{mmap} for reading symbol
2522 tables. For some machines this allows for sharing and quick updates.
2523
2524 @item HAVE_TERMIO
2525 Define this if the host system has @code{termio.h}.
2526
2527 @item INT_MAX
2528 @itemx INT_MIN
2529 @itemx LONG_MAX
2530 @itemx UINT_MAX
2531 @itemx ULONG_MAX
2532 Values for host-side constants.
2533
2534 @item ISATTY
2535 Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2536
2537 @item LONGEST
2538 This is the longest integer type available on the host. If not defined,
2539 it will default to @code{long long} or @code{long}, depending on
2540 @code{CC_HAS_LONG_LONG}.
2541
2542 @item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2543 @cindex @code{long long} data type
2544 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}. This is set
2545 by the @code{configure} script.
2546
2547 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2548 Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2549 the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}. This is set by the
2550 @code{configure} script.
2551
2552 @item HAVE_LONG_DOUBLE
2553 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long double}. This is
2554 set by the @code{configure} script.
2555
2556 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2557 Define this if the host can handle printing of long double float-point
2558 numbers via the printf format conversion specifier @code{Lg}. This is
2559 set by the @code{configure} script.
2560
2561 @item SCANF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2562 Define this if the host can handle the parsing of long double
2563 float-point numbers via the scanf format conversion specifier
2564 @code{Lg}. This is set by the @code{configure} script.
2565
2566 @item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2567 Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2568 @code{n} in the file. This is only used when reading source files. It
2569 is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2570
2571 @item L_SET
2572 This macro is used as the argument to @code{lseek} (or, most commonly,
2573 @code{bfd_seek}). FIXME, should be replaced by SEEK_SET instead,
2574 which is the POSIX equivalent.
2575
2576 @item NORETURN
2577 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as @code{volatile},
2578 that can be used in both the declaration and definition of functions to
2579 indicate that they never return. The default is already set correctly
2580 if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be defined.
2581
2582 @item ATTR_NORETURN
2583 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as
2584 @code{__attribute__ ((noreturn))}, that can be used in the declarations
2585 of functions to indicate that they never return. The default is already
2586 set correctly if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be
2587 defined.
2588
2589 @item SEEK_CUR
2590 @itemx SEEK_SET
2591 Define these to appropriate value for the system @code{lseek}, if not already
2592 defined.
2593
2594 @item STOP_SIGNAL
2595 This is the signal for stopping @value{GDBN}. Defaults to
2596 @code{SIGTSTP}. (Only redefined for the Convex.)
2597
2598 @item USG
2599 Means that System V (prior to SVR4) include files are in use. (FIXME:
2600 This symbol is abused in @file{infrun.c}, @file{regex.c}, and
2601 @file{utils.c} for other things, at the moment.)
2602
2603 @item lint
2604 Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2605
2606 @item volatile
2607 Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2608 @code{/**/}.
2609 @end ftable
2610
2611
2612 @node Target Architecture Definition
2613
2614 @chapter Target Architecture Definition
2615
2616 @cindex target architecture definition
2617 @value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2618 machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2619 with them.
2620
2621 The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2622 @code{struct gdbarch *}. The structure, and its methods, are generated
2623 using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2624
2625 @menu
2626 * OS ABI Variant Handling::
2627 * Initialize New Architecture::
2628 * Registers and Memory::
2629 * Pointers and Addresses::
2630 * Address Classes::
2631 * Raw and Virtual Registers::
2632 * Register and Memory Data::
2633 * Frame Interpretation::
2634 * Inferior Call Setup::
2635 * Compiler Characteristics::
2636 * Target Conditionals::
2637 * Adding a New Target::
2638 @end menu
2639
2640 @node OS ABI Variant Handling
2641 @section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2642 @cindex OS ABI variants
2643
2644 @value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2645 ABIs. An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2646 variables in the target architecture definition. There are two major
2647 components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2648
2649 A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2650 (the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2651 OS ABI of that file. Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2652 to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2653 considered to be @dfn{specific}. A match from a specific sniffer
2654 overrides a match from a generic sniffer. Multiple sniffers for an
2655 architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2656 different operating systems which use the same basic file format. The
2657 OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2658 examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2659 sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2660
2661 @cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2662 A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2663 selected OS ABI. There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2664 for each BFD architecture.
2665
2666 The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2667
2668 @table @code
2669
2670 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2671 @item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2672 Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2673
2674 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2675 @item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2676 The ABI of the inferior is unknown. The default @code{gdbarch}
2677 settings for the architecture will be used.
2678
2679 @findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2680 @item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2681 UNIX System V Release 4.
2682
2683 @findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2684 @item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2685 GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2686
2687 @findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2688 @item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2689 Sun Solaris.
2690
2691 @findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2692 @item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2693 OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2694
2695 @findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2696 @item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2697 GNU using the Linux kernel.
2698
2699 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2700 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2701 FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2702
2703 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2704 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2705 FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2706
2707 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2708 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2709 NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2710
2711 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2712 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2713 NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2714
2715 @findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2716 @item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2717 OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2718
2719 @findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2720 @item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2721 Windows CE.
2722
2723 @findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2724 @item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2725 DJGPP.
2726
2727 @findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2728 @item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2729 Irix.
2730
2731 @findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2732 @item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2733 Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2734
2735 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2736 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2737 HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2738
2739 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2740 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2741 HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2742
2743 @findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2744 @item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2745 QNX Neutrino.
2746
2747 @findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2748 @item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2749 Cygwin.
2750
2751 @findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2752 @item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2753 AIX.
2754
2755 @end table
2756
2757 Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2758
2759 @deftypefun const char *gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2760 Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2761 @end deftypefun
2762
2763 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2764 Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2765 architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2766 @var{machine} and @var{osabi}. In most cases, a value of zero for the
2767 machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2768 will suffice.
2769 @end deftypefun
2770
2771 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2772 Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2773 BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2774 If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2775 be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2776 any architecture.
2777 @end deftypefun
2778
2779 @deftypefun enum gdb_osabi gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2780 Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2781 The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2782 be determined.
2783 @end deftypefun
2784
2785 @deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2786 Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2787 @code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}. If a handler
2788 corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2789 architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2790 with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2791 @end deftypefun
2792
2793 @deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2794 Helper routine for ELF file sniffers. Examine the file described by
2795 @var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2796 from the note. This function should be called via
2797 @code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2798 @end deftypefun
2799
2800 @node Initialize New Architecture
2801 @section Initializing a New Architecture
2802
2803 Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
2804 via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} constant. The @code{gdbarch} is
2805 registered by a call to @code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from
2806 the file's @code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will
2807 be automatically called during @value{GDBN} startup. The arguments
2808 are a @sc{bfd} architecture constant and an initialization function.
2809
2810 The initialization function has this type:
2811
2812 @smallexample
2813 static struct gdbarch *
2814 @var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
2815 struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
2816 @end smallexample
2817
2818 The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
2819 architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
2820 have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
2821 value.
2822
2823 The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
2824 is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not. Then, it should
2825 search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
2826 return one if found. Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
2827 create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
2828
2829 Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
2830 architecture. Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
2831 defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
2832 However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
2833 so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
2834 defaults from @var{arches}.
2835
2836 @node Registers and Memory
2837 @section Registers and Memory
2838
2839 @value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
2840 @value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
2841 block of memory. Each register may have a different size.
2842
2843 @value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
2844 compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
2845 that they do match up accurately. The only way to make this work is
2846 to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
2847 and to reflect that in the @code{gdbarch_register_name} and related functions.
2848
2849 @value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
2850
2851 @node Pointers and Addresses
2852 @section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
2853 @cindex pointer representation
2854 @cindex address representation
2855 @cindex word-addressed machines
2856 @cindex separate data and code address spaces
2857 @cindex spaces, separate data and code address
2858 @cindex address spaces, separate data and code
2859 @cindex code pointers, word-addressed
2860 @cindex converting between pointers and addresses
2861 @cindex D10V addresses
2862
2863 On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
2864 indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
2865 whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to. On such
2866 machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
2867 However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
2868 address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
2869 identity, and allows a larger code address space.
2870
2871 For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
2872 instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
2873 actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions. However, since you can't
2874 jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
2875 full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
2876 If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
2877 then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
2878 However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
2879 low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
2880 zero---byte addresses waste two bits. So instead of byte addresses,
2881 the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
2882 refer to code. Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
2883 code space.
2884
2885 However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
2886 forms on the D10V. The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
2887 @code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
2888 @code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
2889
2890 (The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
2891 affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
2892 going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
2893
2894 To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
2895 one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
2896 byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
2897 of an address of a particular type of data. In the example above,
2898 @code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
2899 @code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
2900 @value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
2901 and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
2902
2903 Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
2904 processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly. Thus,
2905 each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
2906 distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
2907 clean up some architecture-independent code.
2908
2909 Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
2910
2911 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
2912 Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
2913 @var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
2914 appropriate for the current architecture. This yields an address
2915 @value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc. Note that
2916 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2917 inferior's.
2918
2919 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2920 extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
2921 @var{buf} and returns it. However, if the current architecture is the
2922 D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
2923 @var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
2924
2925 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2926 will signal an internal error.
2927 @end deftypefun
2928
2929 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2930 Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
2931 pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture. Note that
2932 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2933 inferior's.
2934
2935 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2936 stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
2937 appropriate length in @var{buf}. However, if the current architecture
2938 is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
2939 a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
2940
2941 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2942 will signal an internal error.
2943 @end deftypefun
2944
2945 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
2946 Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
2947 as appropriate for the current architecture.
2948
2949 This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
2950 For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
2951 described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
2952 @end deftypefun
2953
2954 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2955 Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
2956 the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
2957 This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
2958 above for @code{store_typed_address}.
2959 @end deftypefun
2960
2961 Here are two functions which architectures can define to indicate the
2962 relationship between pointers and addresses. These have default
2963 definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
2964 simple unsigned byte addresses.
2965
2966 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
2967 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
2968 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
2969 address the pointer refers to.
2970
2971 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2972 C@t{++} reference type.
2973 @end deftypefun
2974
2975 @deftypefun void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2976 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
2977 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
2978
2979 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2980 C@t{++} reference type.
2981 @end deftypefun
2982
2983 @node Address Classes
2984 @section Address Classes
2985 @cindex address classes
2986 @cindex DW_AT_byte_size
2987 @cindex DW_AT_address_class
2988
2989 Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
2990 via the debug information. For example, some programming environments
2991 define addresses of several different sizes. If the debug information
2992 distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
2993 info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
2994 address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
2995 following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
2996 types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
2997 a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
2998
2999 @deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3000 Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
3001 is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
3002 This function is normally called from within a symbol reader. See
3003 @file{dwarf2read.c}.
3004 @end deftypefun
3005
3006 @deftypefun char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{type_flags})
3007 Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
3008 its name.
3009 @end deftypefun
3010 @deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{name}, int *var{type_flags_ptr})
3011 Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
3012 for that address class qualifier.
3013 @end deftypefun
3014
3015 Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
3016 the address class functions are defined by default. Predicate
3017 functions are provided to detect when they are defined.
3018
3019 Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
3020 32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported. Furthermore,
3021 suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
3022 uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
3023 of these "short" pointers. The following functions could be defined
3024 to implement the address class functions:
3025
3026 @smallexample
3027 somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
3028 int dwarf2_addr_class)
3029 @{
3030 if (byte_size == 2)
3031 return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3032 else
3033 return 0;
3034 @}
3035
3036 static char *
3037 somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
3038 @{
3039 if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
3040 return "short";
3041 else
3042 return NULL;
3043 @}
3044
3045 int
3046 somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
3047 int *type_flags_ptr)
3048 @{
3049 if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
3050 @{
3051 *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3052 return 1;
3053 @}
3054 else
3055 return 0;
3056 @}
3057 @end smallexample
3058
3059 The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
3060 to indicate the presence of one of these "short" pointers. E.g, if
3061 the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is one of these
3062 short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following behavior:
3063
3064 @smallexample
3065 (gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
3066 type = int * @@short
3067 @end smallexample
3068
3069
3070 @node Raw and Virtual Registers
3071 @section Raw and Virtual Register Representations
3072 @cindex raw register representation
3073 @cindex virtual register representation
3074 @cindex representations, raw and virtual registers
3075
3076 @emph{Maintainer note: This section is pretty much obsolete. The
3077 functionality described here has largely been replaced by
3078 pseudo-registers and the mechanisms described in @ref{Target
3079 Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3080 Representations}. See also @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs/,
3081 Bug Tracking Database} and
3082 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, ARI Index} for more
3083 up-to-date information.}
3084
3085 Some architectures use one representation for a value when it lives in a
3086 register, but use a different representation when it lives in memory.
3087 In @value{GDBN}'s terminology, the @dfn{raw} representation is the one used in
3088 the target registers, and the @dfn{virtual} representation is the one
3089 used in memory, and within @value{GDBN} @code{struct value} objects.
3090
3091 @emph{Maintainer note: Notice that the same mechanism is being used to
3092 both convert a register to a @code{struct value} and alternative
3093 register forms.}
3094
3095 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the virtual and
3096 raw representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3097 However, they do occasionally differ. For example:
3098
3099 @itemize @bullet
3100 @item
3101 The x86 architecture supports an 80-bit @code{long double} type. However, when
3102 we store those values in memory, they occupy twelve bytes: the
3103 floating-point number occupies the first ten, and the final two bytes
3104 are unused. This keeps the values aligned on four-byte boundaries,
3105 allowing more efficient access. Thus, the x86 80-bit floating-point
3106 type is the raw representation, and the twelve-byte loosely-packed
3107 arrangement is the virtual representation.
3108
3109 @item
3110 Some 64-bit MIPS targets present 32-bit registers to @value{GDBN} as 64-bit
3111 registers, with garbage in their upper bits. @value{GDBN} ignores the top 32
3112 bits. Thus, the 64-bit form, with garbage in the upper 32 bits, is the
3113 raw representation, and the trimmed 32-bit representation is the
3114 virtual representation.
3115 @end itemize
3116
3117 In general, the raw representation is determined by the architecture, or
3118 @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while the virtual representation
3119 can be chosen for @value{GDBN}'s convenience. @value{GDBN}'s register file,
3120 @code{registers}, holds the register contents in raw format, and the
3121 @value{GDBN} remote protocol transmits register values in raw format.
3122
3123 Your architecture may define the following macros to request
3124 conversions between the raw and virtual format:
3125
3126 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE (int @var{reg})
3127 Return non-zero if register number @var{reg}'s value needs different raw
3128 and virtual formats.
3129
3130 You should not use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} for a register
3131 unless this macro returns a non-zero value for that register.
3132 @end deftypefn
3133
3134 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3135 The size of register number @var{reg}'s raw value. This is the number
3136 of bytes the register will occupy in @code{registers}, or in a @value{GDBN}
3137 remote protocol packet.
3138 @end deftypefn
3139
3140 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3141 The size of register number @var{reg}'s value, in its virtual format.
3142 This is the size a @code{struct value}'s buffer will have, holding that
3143 register's value.
3144 @end deftypefn
3145
3146 @deftypefn {Target Macro} struct type *DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (int @var{reg})
3147 This is the type of the virtual representation of register number
3148 @var{reg}. Note that there is no need for a macro giving a type for the
3149 register's raw form; once the register's value has been obtained, @value{GDBN}
3150 always uses the virtual form.
3151 @end deftypefn
3152
3153 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL (int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3154 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3155 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3156 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3157 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3158
3159 Note that @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} and
3160 @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3161 arguments in different orders.
3162
3163 You should only use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} with registers
3164 for which the @code{REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE} macro returns a non-zero
3165 value.
3166 @end deftypefn
3167
3168 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW (struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3169 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3170 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3171 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3172 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3173
3174 Note that REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL and REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW take
3175 their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3176 @end deftypefn
3177
3178
3179 @node Register and Memory Data
3180 @section Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3181 @cindex register representation
3182 @cindex memory representation
3183 @cindex representations, register and memory
3184 @cindex register data formats, converting
3185 @cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3186
3187 @emph{Maintainer's note: The way GDB manipulates registers is undergoing
3188 significant change. Many of the macros and functions referred to in this
3189 section are likely to be subject to further revision. See
3190 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, A.R. Index} and
3191 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs, Bug Tracking Database} for
3192 further information. cagney/2002-05-06.}
3193
3194 Some architectures can represent a data object in a register using a
3195 form that is different to the objects more normal memory representation.
3196 For example:
3197
3198 @itemize @bullet
3199
3200 @item
3201 The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3202 floating-point registers.
3203
3204 @item
3205 The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers. The
3206 @code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80 bits
3207 when stored in a register.
3208
3209 @end itemize
3210
3211 In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3212 the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3213 the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3214 Interface.
3215
3216 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3217 representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3218 However, they do occasionally differ. Your architecture may define the
3219 following macros to request conversions between the register and memory
3220 representations of a data type:
3221
3222 @deftypefun int gdbarch_convert_register_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg})
3223 Return non-zero if the representation of a data value stored in this
3224 register may be different to the representation of that same data value
3225 when stored in memory.
3226
3227 When non-zero, the macros @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3228 @code{value_to_register} are used to perform any necessary conversion.
3229 @end deftypefun
3230
3231 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_to_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3232 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of type
3233 @var{type}. The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw
3234 format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at @var{to}.
3235
3236 Note that @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and @code{gdbarch_value_to_register}
3237 take their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3238
3239 You should only use @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} with registers for which
3240 the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a non-zero value.
3241 @end deftypefun
3242
3243 @deftypefun void gdbarch_value_to_register (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3244 Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3245 raw format.
3246
3247 Note that @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and @code{gdbarch_value_to_register}
3248 take their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3249
3250 You should only use @code{gdbarch_value_to_register} with registers for which
3251 the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a non-zero value.
3252 @end deftypefun
3253
3254 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_TYPE (int @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3255 See @file{mips-tdep.c}. It does not do what you want.
3256 @end deftypefn
3257
3258 @node Frame Interpretation
3259 @section Frame Interpretation
3260
3261 @node Inferior Call Setup
3262 @section Inferior Call Setup
3263
3264 @node Compiler Characteristics
3265 @section Compiler Characteristics
3266
3267 @node Target Conditionals
3268 @section Target Conditionals
3269
3270 This section describes the macros and functions that you can use to define the
3271 target machine.
3272
3273 @table @code
3274
3275 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
3276 @findex gdbarch_addr_bits_remove
3277 If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
3278 really part of the address, then this function is used to zero those bits in
3279 @var{addr}. This is only used for addresses of instructions, and even then not
3280 in all contexts.
3281
3282 For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
3283 2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
3284 instruction. Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
3285 boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
3286 address of the instruction. @code{gdbarch_addr_bits_remove} would then for
3287 example look like that:
3288 @smallexample
3289 arch_addr_bits_remove (CORE_ADDR addr)
3290 @{
3291 return (addr &= ~0x3);
3292 @}
3293 @end smallexample
3294
3295 @item int address_class_name_to_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
3296 @findex address_class_name_to_type_flags
3297 If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
3298 referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
3299 and return 1. If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
3300 return 0.
3301
3302 The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
3303 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
3304 possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
3305 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3306
3307 @item int address_class_name_to_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
3308 @findex address_class_name_to_type_flags_p
3309 Predicate which indicates whether @code{address_class_name_to_type_flags}
3310 has been defined.
3311
3312 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3313 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags
3314 Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
3315 the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
3316 used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class. The value
3317 returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
3318 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
3319 values or'd together.
3320 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3321
3322 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
3323 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p
3324 Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p} has
3325 been defined.
3326
3327 @item const char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type_flags})
3328 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name
3329 Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
3330 flags given by @var{type_flags}.
3331
3332 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p (@var{gdbarch})
3333 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p
3334 Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name} has been defined.
3335 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3336
3337 @item void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
3338 @findex gdbarch_address_to_pointer
3339 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3340 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3341 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3342 C@t{++} reference type.
3343 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3344
3345 @item int gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion (@var{gdbarch})
3346 @findex gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion
3347 Used to notify if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
3348 parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
3349 original type, rather than the promoted type.
3350
3351 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3352 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3353 Define this if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match the
3354 endianness of the target byte order. A value of 1 means that the bits
3355 are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
3356
3357 @item BREAKPOINT
3358 @findex BREAKPOINT
3359 This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
3360 memory where a breakpoint is set. Although it's common to use a trap
3361 instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
3362 pattern could be an invalid instruction. The breakpoint must be no
3363 longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
3364
3365 @code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
3366 @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
3367
3368 @item BIG_BREAKPOINT
3369 @itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3370 @findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3371 @findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
3372 Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
3373
3374 @code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
3375 favor of @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
3376
3377 @item const gdb_byte *gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
3378 @findex gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc
3379 @anchor{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} Use the program counter to determine the
3380 contents and size of a breakpoint instruction. It returns a pointer to
3381 a string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
3382 length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
3383 counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
3384 breakpoint should be inserted.
3385
3386 Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
3387 not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
3388 instruction. The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
3389 instruction of the architecture.
3390
3391 Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
3392
3393 @item int gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
3394 @itemx gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
3395 @findex gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint
3396 @findex gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint
3397 Insert or remove memory based breakpoints. Reasonable defaults
3398 (@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
3399 @code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
3400 provided so that it is not necessary to set these for most
3401 architectures. Architectures which may want to set
3402 @code{gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint} and @code{gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint} will likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
3403 conventional manner.
3404
3405 It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
3406 custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
3407 @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} needs to read the target's memory for some
3408 reason.
3409
3410 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bpaddr})
3411 @findex gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address
3412 @cindex breakpoint address adjusted
3413 Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
3414 address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
3415 breakpoint placement. This method is not needed by most targets.
3416
3417 The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
3418 The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
3419 instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
3420 instruction or instruction bundle. When the processor executes
3421 one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
3422 in parallel.
3423
3424 In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
3425 from distinct source statements into the same bundle. The line number
3426 information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
3427 refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle. So,
3428 if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
3429 statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
3430 instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
3431 (Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
3432 in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
3433 at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
3434
3435 The FR-V's @code{gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address} method will adjust a
3436 breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
3437 the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
3438
3439 Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
3440 expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
3441 is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
3442
3443 @item int gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})
3444 @findex gdbarch_call_dummy_location
3445 See the file @file{inferior.h}.
3446
3447 This method has been replaced by @code{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}
3448 (@pxref{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}).
3449
3450 @item int gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regum})
3451 @findex gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register
3452 This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
3453 from an inferior process. This is only relevant if
3454 @code{FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS} is not defined.
3455
3456 @item int gdbarch_cannot_store_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum})
3457 @findex gdbarch_cannot_store_register
3458 This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
3459 written to the target. This is often the case for program counters,
3460 status words, and other special registers. This function returns 0 as
3461 default so that @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
3462
3463 @item int gdbarch_convert_register_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type})
3464 @findex gdbarch_convert_register_p
3465 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} can represent data values in a
3466 non-standard form.
3467 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3468
3469 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break (@var{gdbarch})
3470 @findex gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break
3471 This function shall return the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
3472 program encounters a breakpoint. This is often the number of bytes in
3473 @code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always. For most targets this value will be 0.
3474
3475 @item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
3476 @findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
3477 If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
3478 library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
3479
3480 @item void gdbarch_print_float_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{file}, @var{frame}, @var{args})
3481 @findex gdbarch_print_float_info
3482 If defined, then the @samp{info float} command will print information about
3483 the processor's floating point unit.
3484
3485 @item void gdbarch_print_registers_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{all})
3486 @findex gdbarch_print_registers_info
3487 If defined, pretty print the value of the register @var{regnum} for the
3488 specified @var{frame}. If the value of @var{regnum} is -1, pretty print
3489 either all registers (@var{all} is non zero) or a select subset of
3490 registers (@var{all} is zero).
3491
3492 The default method prints one register per line, and if @var{all} is
3493 zero omits floating-point registers.
3494
3495 @item int gdbarch_print_vector_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{file}, @var{frame}, @var{args})
3496 @findex gdbarch_print_vector_info
3497 If defined, then the @samp{info vector} command will call this function
3498 to print information about the processor's vector unit.
3499
3500 By default, the @samp{info vector} command will print all vector
3501 registers (the register's type having the vector attribute).
3502
3503 @item int gdbarch_dwarf_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf_regnr})
3504 @findex gdbarch_dwarf_reg_to_regnum
3505 Convert DWARF register number @var{dwarf_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum. If
3506 not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3507
3508 @item int gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf2_regnr})
3509 @findex gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum
3510 Convert DWARF2 register number @var{dwarf2_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.
3511 If not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3512
3513 @item int gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ecoff_regnr})
3514 @findex gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum
3515 Convert ECOFF register number @var{ecoff_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum. If
3516 not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3517
3518 @item void gdbarch_extract_return_value (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{regbuf}, @var{valbuf})
3519 @findex gdbarch_extract_return_value
3520 Define this to extract a function's return value of type @var{type} from
3521 the raw register state @var{regbuf} and copy that, in virtual format,
3522 into @var{valbuf}.
3523
3524 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
3525 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
3526
3527 @item DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS(@var{regbuf})
3528 @findex DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS
3529 @anchor{DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS}
3530 When defined, extract from the array @var{regbuf} (containing the raw
3531 register state) the @code{CORE_ADDR} at which a function should return
3532 its structure value.
3533
3534 @xref{gdbarch_return_value}.
3535
3536 @item DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS_P()
3537 @findex DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS_P
3538 Predicate for @code{DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS}.
3539
3540 @item DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3541 @findex DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3542 If the virtual frame pointer is kept in a register, then define this
3543 macro to be the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3544
3545 This should only need to be defined if @code{DEPRECATED_TARGET_READ_FP}
3546 is not defined.
3547
3548 @item DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION(@var{fi})
3549 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION
3550 Define this to an expression that returns 1 if the function invocation
3551 represented by @var{fi} does not have a stack frame associated with it.
3552 Otherwise return 0.
3553
3554 @item CORE_ADDR frame_align (@var{gdbarch}, @var{address})
3555 @anchor{frame_align}
3556 @findex frame_align
3557 Define this to adjust @var{address} so that it meets the alignment
3558 requirements for the start of a new stack frame. A stack frame's
3559 alignment requirements are typically stronger than a target processors
3560 stack alignment requirements.
3561
3562 This function is used to ensure that, when creating a dummy frame, both
3563 the initial stack pointer and (if needed) the address of the return
3564 value are correctly aligned.
3565
3566 This function always adjusts the address in the direction of stack
3567 growth.
3568
3569 By default, no frame based stack alignment is performed.
3570
3571 @item int gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size (@var{gdbarch})
3572 @findex gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size
3573 The number of bytes, beyond the innermost-stack-address, reserved by the
3574 @sc{abi}. A function is permitted to use this scratch area (instead of
3575 allocating extra stack space).
3576
3577 When performing an inferior function call, to ensure that it does not
3578 modify this area, @value{GDBN} adjusts the innermost-stack-address by
3579 @var{gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size} bytes before pushing parameters onto the
3580 stack.
3581
3582 By default, zero bytes are allocated. The value must be aligned
3583 (@pxref{frame_align}).
3584
3585 The @sc{amd64} (nee x86-64) @sc{abi} documentation refers to the
3586 @emph{red zone} when describing this scratch area.
3587 @cindex red zone
3588
3589 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN(@var{frame})
3590 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN
3591 Given @var{frame}, return a pointer to the calling frame.
3592
3593 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID(@var{chain}, @var{thisframe})
3594 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID
3595 Define this to be an expression that returns zero if the given frame is an
3596 outermost frame, with no caller, and nonzero otherwise. Most normal
3597 situations can be handled without defining this macro, including @code{NULL}
3598 chain pointers, dummy frames, and frames whose PC values are inside the
3599 startup file (e.g.@: @file{crt0.o}), inside @code{main}, or inside
3600 @code{_start}.
3601
3602 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS(@var{frame})
3603 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS
3604 See @file{frame.h}. Determines the address of all registers in the
3605 current stack frame storing each in @code{frame->saved_regs}. Space for
3606 @code{frame->saved_regs} shall be allocated by
3607 @code{DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS} using
3608 @code{frame_saved_regs_zalloc}.
3609
3610 @code{FRAME_FIND_SAVED_REGS} is deprecated.
3611
3612 @item int gdbarch_frame_num_args (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
3613 @findex gdbarch_frame_num_args
3614 For the frame described by @var{frame} return the number of arguments that
3615 are being passed. If the number of arguments is not known, return
3616 @code{-1}.
3617
3618 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC(@var{frame})
3619 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC
3620 @anchor{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC} Given @var{frame}, return the pc
3621 saved there. This is the return address.
3622
3623 This method is deprecated. @xref{gdbarch_unwind_pc}.
3624
3625 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_unwind_pc (@var{next_frame})
3626 @findex gdbarch_unwind_pc
3627 @anchor{gdbarch_unwind_pc} Return the instruction address, in
3628 @var{next_frame}'s caller, at which execution will resume after
3629 @var{next_frame} returns. This is commonly referred to as the return address.
3630
3631 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3632 is typically no more than:
3633
3634 @smallexample
3635 ULONGEST pc;
3636 pc = frame_unwind_unsigned_register (next_frame, S390_PC_REGNUM);
3637 return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, pc);
3638 @end smallexample
3639
3640 @noindent
3641 @xref{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC}, which this method replaces.
3642
3643 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_unwind_sp (@var{gdbarch}, @var{next_frame})
3644 @findex gdbarch_unwind_sp
3645 @anchor{gdbarch_unwind_sp} Return the frame's inner most stack address. This is
3646 commonly referred to as the frame's @dfn{stack pointer}.
3647
3648 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3649 is typically no more than:
3650
3651 @smallexample
3652 ULONGEST sp;
3653 sp = frame_unwind_unsigned_register (next_frame, S390_SP_REGNUM);
3654 return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, sp);
3655 @end smallexample
3656
3657 @noindent
3658 @xref{TARGET_READ_SP}, which this method replaces.
3659
3660 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3661 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3662 For some COFF targets, the @code{x_sym.x_misc.x_fsize} field of the
3663 function end symbol is 0. For such targets, you must define
3664 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE} to expand into the standard size of a
3665 function's epilogue.
3666
3667 @item DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3668 @findex DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3669 An integer, giving the offset in bytes from a function's address (as
3670 used in the values of symbols, function pointers, etc.), and the
3671 function's first genuine instruction.
3672
3673 This is zero on almost all machines: the function's address is usually
3674 the address of its first instruction. However, on the VAX, for
3675 example, each function starts with two bytes containing a bitmask
3676 indicating which registers to save upon entry to the function. The
3677 VAX @code{call} instructions check this value, and save the
3678 appropriate registers automatically. Thus, since the offset from the
3679 function's address to its first instruction is two bytes,
3680 @code{DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET} would be 2 on the VAX.
3681
3682 @item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3683 @itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3684 @findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3685 @findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3686 If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
3687 look for to detect that GCC compiled the file. The default symbols
3688 are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
3689 respectively. (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
3690
3691 @item gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
3692 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
3693 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
3694 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
3695 the header file @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
3696
3697 This macro determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
3698 assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp} breakpoint. It takes a
3699 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
3700 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
3701
3702 @item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3703 @findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3704 Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system. This
3705 conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
3706 feature-specific macros. It was introduced in a haste and we are
3707 repenting at leisure.
3708
3709 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
3710 An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
3711 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
3712
3713 @item int gdbarch_inner_than (@var{gdbarch}, @var{lhs}, @var{rhs})
3714 @findex gdbarch_inner_than
3715 Returns non-zero if stack address @var{lhs} is inner than (nearer to the
3716 stack top) stack address @var{rhs}. Let the function return
3717 @w{@code{lhs < rhs}} if the target's stack grows downward in memory, or
3718 @w{@code{lhs > rsh}} if the stack grows upward.
3719
3720 @item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
3721 @findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
3722 Returns non-zero if the given @var{addr} is in the epilogue of a function.
3723 The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
3724 the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
3725 final `return from function call' instruction.
3726
3727 @item int gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{name})
3728 @findex gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline
3729 Define this function to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3730 trampoline that returns from a shared library.
3731
3732 @item IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE (@var{pc})
3733 @findex IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE
3734 Define this to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3735 dynamic linker.
3736
3737 @item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
3738 @findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
3739 Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
3740 should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
3741 function. A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
3742 to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
3743 stepping will suffice.
3744
3745 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_integer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
3746 @findex gdbarch_integer_to_address
3747 @cindex converting integers to addresses
3748 Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
3749 conversions specially. Converts that value to an address according to
3750 the current architectures conventions.
3751
3752 @emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
3753 their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
3754 @code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
3755 computed by the target program. Any deviation from this rule can cause
3756 major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully. In
3757 other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
3758 conversions in clever and useful ways. It has, however, been pointed
3759 out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
3760 to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
3761 disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}. Adding an architecture
3762 method like @code{gdbarch_integer_to_address} certainly makes it possible for
3763 @value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
3764
3765 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
3766 Addresses}.
3767
3768 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
3769 @findex gdbarch_pointer_to_address
3770 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3771 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
3772 address the pointer refers to.
3773 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3774
3775 @item void gdbarch_register_to_value(@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{fur})
3776 @findex gdbarch_register_to_value
3777 Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
3778 @var{type}.
3779 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3780
3781 @item register_reggroup_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, @var{reggroup})
3782 @findex register_reggroup_p
3783 @cindex register groups
3784 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} is a member of the register
3785 group @var{reggroup}.
3786
3787 By default, registers are grouped as follows:
3788
3789 @table @code
3790 @item float_reggroup
3791 Any register with a valid name and a floating-point type.
3792 @item vector_reggroup
3793 Any register with a valid name and a vector type.
3794 @item general_reggroup
3795 Any register with a valid name and a type other than vector or
3796 floating-point. @samp{float_reggroup}.
3797 @item save_reggroup
3798 @itemx restore_reggroup
3799 @itemx all_reggroup
3800 Any register with a valid name.
3801 @end table
3802
3803 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (@var{reg})
3804 @findex DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE
3805 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}; defaults to the size of the
3806 register's virtual type.
3807 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}.
3808 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3809
3810 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})
3811 @findex REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE
3812 Return the virtual type of @var{reg}.
3813 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3814
3815 @item struct type *register_type (@var{gdbarch}, @var{reg})
3816 @findex register_type
3817 If defined, return the type of register @var{reg}. This function
3818 supersedes @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE}. @xref{Target Architecture
3819 Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3820
3821 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3822 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
3823 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
3824 form.
3825 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3826
3827 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3828 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
3829 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
3830 form.
3831 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3832
3833 @item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
3834 @findex regset_from_core_section
3835 Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
3836 @var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
3837
3838 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
3839 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
3840 Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
3841 mechanism. The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
3842
3843 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
3844 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
3845 A function that inserts or removes (depending on
3846 @var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
3847 the next instruction. See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
3848 for examples.
3849
3850 @item SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING
3851 @findex SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING
3852 Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
3853 debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
3854 them. So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
3855 address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
3856 linking faster.
3857
3858 @code{SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING} indicates that a particular set of
3859 hacks of this sort are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN}
3860 entries in stabs-format debugging information. @code{N_SO} stabs mark
3861 the beginning and ending addresses of compilation units in the text
3862 segment. @code{N_FUN} stabs mark the starts and ends of functions.
3863
3864 @code{SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING} means two things:
3865
3866 @itemize @bullet
3867 @item
3868 @code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero. Instead, you should find the
3869 addresses where the function starts by taking the function name from
3870 the stab, and then looking that up in the minsyms (the
3871 linker/assembler symbol table). In other words, the stab has the
3872 name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place that carries
3873 the address.
3874
3875 @item
3876 @code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too. You just look at the
3877 @code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab,
3878 and guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from
3879 them.
3880 @end itemize
3881
3882 @item int gdbarch_pc_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
3883 @findex gdbarch_pc_regnum
3884 If the program counter is kept in a register, then let this function return
3885 the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3886
3887 This should only need to be defined if @code{gdbarch_read_pc} and
3888 @code{gdbarch_write_pc} are not defined.
3889
3890 @item int gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
3891 @findex gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr
3892 @anchor{gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this function to return
3893 nonzero if a function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference
3894 instead of value.
3895
3896 @item PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3897 @findex PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3898 A hook defined for XCOFF reading.
3899
3900 @item gdbarch_ps_regnum (@var{gdbarch}
3901 @findex gdbarch_ps_regnum
3902 If defined, this function returns the number of the processor status
3903 register.
3904 (This definition is only used in generic code when parsing "$ps".)
3905
3906 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
3907 @findex gdbarch_push_dummy_call
3908 @findex DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS.
3909 @anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
3910 the inferior function onto the stack. In addition to pushing @var{nargs}, the
3911 code should push @var{struct_addr} (when @var{struct_return} is non-zero), and
3912 the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
3913
3914 @var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
3915 function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
3916
3917 Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
3918
3919 This method replaces @code{DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS}.
3920
3921 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{regcache})
3922 @findex gdbarch_push_dummy_code
3923 @anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
3924 instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
3925 called function should return.
3926
3927 Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
3928 should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
3929 the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
3930
3931 By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
3932 (@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
3933 reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
3934
3935 This method replaces @w{@code{gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})}} and
3936 @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_SIZE}.
3937
3938 @item const char *gdbarch_register_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnr})
3939 @findex gdbarch_register_name
3940 Return the name of register @var{regnr} as a string. May return @code{NULL}
3941 to indicate that @var{regnr} is not a valid register.
3942
3943 @item SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS (@var{sp})
3944 @findex SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS
3945 @anchor{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS} Used in @samp{call_function_by_hand} to
3946 notify the target dependent code of the top-of-stack value that will be
3947 passed to the inferior code. This is the value of the @code{SP}
3948 after both the dummy frame and space for parameters/results have been
3949 allocated on the stack. @xref{gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id}.
3950
3951 @item int gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sdb_regnr})
3952 @findex gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum
3953 Use this function to convert sdb register @var{sdb_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
3954 regnum. If not defined, no conversion will be done.
3955
3956 @item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
3957 @findex gdbarch_return_value
3958 @anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
3959 type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
3960 would use.
3961
3962 @value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
3963 @code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
3964 in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
3965 value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
3966 passed in as the function's first parameter.
3967
3968 If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
3969 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
3970 @var{regcache}.
3971
3972 If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
3973 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
3974 @var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
3975 just returned function).
3976
3977 @xref{DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS}, for a description of how
3978 return-values that use the struct convention are handled.
3979
3980 @emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
3981 store methods. By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
3982 the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place. If
3983 @value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
3984 instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
3985 return-value extract and store.}
3986
3987 @emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
3988 parameter, and such a parameter should not be added. If an architecture
3989 that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
3990 then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
3991 @var{function} should be pursued.}
3992
3993 @emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
3994 to the inner most frame. While replacing @var{regcache} with a
3995 @code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
3996 limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
3997
3998 @item void gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
3999 @findex gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint
4000 Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint. @value{GDBN} normally
4001 steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
4002 re-inserting the breakpoint. However, permanent breakpoints are
4003 hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
4004 doesn't work. Calling @code{gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint} adjusts the
4005 processor's state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint.
4006 This function does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
4007 of a branch or jump.
4008
4009 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_prologue (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ip})
4010 @findex gdbarch_skip_prologue
4011 A function that returns the address of the ``real'' code beyond the
4012 function entry prologue found at @var{ip}.
4013
4014 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{pc})
4015 @findex gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code
4016 If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
4017 the functions being called, then define this function to return a new PC
4018 that is at the start of the real function.
4019
4020 @item int gdbarch_sp_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4021 @findex gdbarch_sp_regnum
4022 If the stack-pointer is kept in a register, then use this function to return
4023 the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register, or -1 if
4024 there is no such register.
4025
4026 @item int gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{stab_regnr})
4027 @findex gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum
4028 Use this function to convert stab register @var{stab_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4029 regnum. If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4030
4031 @item void gdbarch_store_return_value (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{regcache}, @var{valbuf})
4032 @findex gdbarch_store_return_value
4033 A function that writes the function return value, found in
4034 @var{valbuf}, into the @var{regcache}. @var{type} is the type of the
4035 value that is to be returned.
4036
4037 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
4038 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
4039
4040 @item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4041 @findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4042 The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable. (Never defined in
4043 current sources.)
4044
4045 @item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4046 @findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4047 Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4048
4049 @item int gdbarch_char_signed (@var{gdbarch})
4050 @findex gdbarch_char_signed
4051 Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4052 it should be unsigned.
4053
4054 The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4055 equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4056 character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4057 Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4058 on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4059
4060 @item int gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4061 @findex gdbarch_double_bit
4062 Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @w{@code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4063
4064 @item int gdbarch_float_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4065 @findex gdbarch_float_bit
4066 Number of bits in a float; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4067
4068 @item int gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4069 @findex gdbarch_int_bit
4070 Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4071
4072 @item int gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4073 @findex gdbarch_long_bit
4074 Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4075
4076 @item int gdbarch_long_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4077 @findex gdbarch_long_double_bit
4078 Number of bits in a long double float;
4079 defaults to @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4080
4081 @item int gdbarch_long_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4082 @findex gdbarch_long_long_bit
4083 Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to
4084 @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4085
4086 @item int gdbarch_ptr_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4087 @findex gdbarch_ptr_bit
4088 Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to
4089 @w{@code{gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4090
4091 @item int gdbarch_short_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4092 @findex gdbarch_short_bit
4093 Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @w{@code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4094
4095 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_read_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
4096 @findex gdbarch_read_pc
4097 @itemx gdbarch_write_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache}, @var{val})
4098 @findex gdbarch_write_pc
4099 @anchor{gdbarch_write_pc}
4100 @itemx TARGET_READ_SP
4101 @findex TARGET_READ_SP
4102 @itemx TARGET_READ_FP
4103 @findex TARGET_READ_FP
4104 @findex gdbarch_read_pc
4105 @findex gdbarch_write_pc
4106 @findex read_sp
4107 @findex read_fp
4108 @anchor{TARGET_READ_SP} These change the behavior of @code{gdbarch_read_pc},
4109 @code{gdbarch_write_pc}, and @code{read_sp}. For most targets, these may be
4110 left undefined. @value{GDBN} will call the read and write register
4111 functions with the relevant @code{_REGNUM} argument.
4112
4113 These macros and functions are useful when a target keeps one of these
4114 registers in a hard to get at place; for example, part in a segment register
4115 and part in an ordinary register.
4116
4117 @xref{gdbarch_unwind_sp}, which replaces @code{TARGET_READ_SP}.
4118
4119 @item void gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{frame_regnum}, @var{frame_offset})
4120 @findex gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer
4121 Returns a @code{(register, offset)} pair representing the virtual frame
4122 pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}. If virtual frame pointers
4123 are not used, a default definition simply returns
4124 @code{DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM}, with an offset of zero.
4125
4126 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4127 If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4128 watchpoints. @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4129 other related macros.
4130
4131 @item int gdbarch_print_insn (@var{gdbarch}, @var{vma}, @var{info})
4132 @findex gdbarch_print_insn
4133 This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
4134 instruction. It prints the instruction at address @var{vma} in
4135 debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes. If
4136 a target doesn't define its own printing routine, it defaults to an
4137 accessor function for the global pointer
4138 @code{deprecated_tm_print_insn}. This usually points to a function in
4139 the @code{opcodes} library (@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).
4140 @var{info} is a structure (of type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in
4141 @file{include/dis-asm.h} used to pass information to the instruction
4142 decoding routine.
4143
4144 @item frame_id gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
4145 @findex gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id
4146 @anchor{gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @w{@code{struct
4147 frame_id}} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
4148 frame. The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
4149 previously saved using @code{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4150 @xref{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4151
4152 @item DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION (@var{gcc_p}, @var{type})
4153 @findex DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION
4154 If defined, this must be an expression that is nonzero if a value of the
4155 given @var{type} being returned from a function must have space
4156 allocated for it on the stack. @var{gcc_p} is true if the function
4157 being considered is known to have been compiled by GCC; this is helpful
4158 for systems where GCC is known to use different calling convention than
4159 other compilers.
4160
4161 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
4162 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
4163
4164 @item void gdbarch_value_to_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4165 @findex gdbarch_value_to_register
4166 Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of a register.
4167 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4168
4169 @end table
4170
4171 Motorola M68K target conditionals.
4172
4173 @ftable @code
4174 @item BPT_VECTOR
4175 Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector. If
4176 not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
4177
4178 @item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
4179 Defaults to @code{1}.
4180
4181 @item const char *gdbarch_name_of_malloc (@var{gdbarch})
4182 @findex gdbarch_name_of_malloc
4183 A string containing the name of the function to call in order to
4184 allocate some memory in the inferior. The default value is "malloc".
4185
4186 @end ftable
4187
4188 @node Adding a New Target
4189 @section Adding a New Target
4190
4191 @cindex adding a target
4192 The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
4193
4194 @table @file
4195 @vindex TDEPFILES
4196 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{ttt}.mt
4197 Contains a Makefile fragment specific to this target. Specifies what
4198 object files are needed for target @var{ttt}, by defining
4199 @samp{TDEPFILES=@dots{}} and @samp{TDEPLIBS=@dots{}}. Also specifies
4200 the header file which describes @var{ttt}, by defining @samp{TM_FILE=
4201 tm-@var{ttt}.h}.
4202
4203 You can also define @samp{TM_CFLAGS}, @samp{TM_CLIBS}, @samp{TM_CDEPS},
4204 but these are now deprecated, replaced by autoconf, and may go away in
4205 future versions of @value{GDBN}.
4206
4207 @item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
4208 Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine. On
4209 some machines it doesn't exist at all. Sometimes the macros in
4210 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h} become very complicated, so they are implemented
4211 as functions here instead, and the macro is simply defined to call the
4212 function. This is vastly preferable, since it is easier to understand
4213 and debug.
4214
4215 @item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
4216 @itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
4217 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4218 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4219 @file{@var{ttt}-tdep.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use
4220 the same processor.
4221
4222 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h
4223 (@file{tm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains
4224 macro definitions about the target machine's registers, stack frame
4225 format and instructions.
4226
4227 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4228
4229 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h
4230 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4231 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4232 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use the
4233 same processor.
4234
4235 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4236
4237 @end table
4238
4239 If you are adding a new operating system for an existing CPU chip, add a
4240 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} file that describes the operating system
4241 facilities that are unusual (extra symbol table info; the breakpoint
4242 instruction needed; etc.). Then write a @file{@var{arch}/tm-@var{os}.h}
4243 that just @code{#include}s @file{tm-@var{arch}.h} and
4244 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h}.
4245
4246 @node Target Descriptions
4247 @chapter Target Descriptions
4248 @cindex target descriptions
4249
4250 The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
4251 contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture. For
4252 some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
4253 instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
4254 @dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
4255 more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
4256 directly.
4257
4258 For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
4259 target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
4260 Debugging with @value{GDBN}}. This section will cover some related
4261 topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
4262
4263 @menu
4264 * Target Descriptions Implementation::
4265 * Adding Target Described Register Support::
4266 @end menu
4267
4268 @node Target Descriptions Implementation
4269 @section Target Descriptions Implementation
4270 @cindex target descriptions, implementation
4271
4272 Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
4273 an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
4274 reverts to a default gdbarch. Then, after connecting, it looks for a
4275 new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
4276
4277 A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
4278 @samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
4279 @code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector. For instance,
4280 the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
4281 64-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
4282
4283 If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
4284 incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}. Any
4285 @samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
4286 architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
4287 new architecture. Then the initialization routine is called, and has
4288 a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
4289 of the target description. For instance, it can recognize any
4290 properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine. Also
4291 see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
4292
4293 @node Adding Target Described Register Support
4294 @section Adding Target Described Register Support
4295 @cindex target descriptions, adding register support
4296
4297 Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
4298 instance of the target. But it takes a little work in the architecture
4299 specific routines to support this.
4300
4301 A target description must either have no registers or a complete
4302 set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
4303 with the target defined registers. It is the architecture's
4304 responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
4305 everything it needs. To keep architecture code simple, the same
4306 mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
4307 standard registers.
4308
4309 If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
4310 registers. The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
4311
4312 @itemize @bullet
4313
4314 @item
4315 Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
4316 searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
4317
4318 @item
4319 Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
4320
4321 @item
4322 Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
4323 to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
4324
4325 @item
4326 Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
4327 feature is missing expected registers. This will produce a warning that
4328 the description was incomplete.
4329
4330 @item
4331 Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
4332 is called.
4333
4334 @item
4335 Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
4336 fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
4337
4338 @item
4339 Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
4340 returning it.
4341
4342 @end itemize
4343
4344 After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
4345 @code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
4346 routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
4347 the target description. @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
4348 for any additional registers in the description.
4349
4350 Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
4351
4352 @itemize @bullet
4353
4354 @item
4355 Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
4356 constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
4357 as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}. But because
4358 pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
4359 which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
4360 can not be used for pseudos. They must be numbered relative to
4361 @code{num_regs} instead.
4362
4363 @item
4364 The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
4365 architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
4366 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
4367 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
4368 describing pseudo registers. These routines will be passed
4369 internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
4370 gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
4371
4372 @end itemize
4373
4374
4375 @node Target Vector Definition
4376
4377 @chapter Target Vector Definition
4378 @cindex target vector
4379
4380 The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
4381 abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
4382 actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
4383 @value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
4384 each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
4385
4386 @menu
4387 * Managing Execution State::
4388 * Existing Targets::
4389 @end menu
4390
4391 @node Managing Execution State
4392 @section Managing Execution State
4393 @cindex execution state
4394
4395 A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
4396 stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
4397 manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
4398 inferior). Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
4399 active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
4400 when the target has exited or not yet started.
4401
4402 For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
4403 not create a running program. Neither registers nor memory are
4404 accessible until @code{run}. Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
4405 program can not continue executing. But in both cases @value{GDBN}
4406 remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
4407 are directed to the simulator.
4408
4409 A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
4410 onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
4411 @code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
4412 @code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
4413
4414 A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
4415 still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
4416 @code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}. Instead, it should
4417 call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
4418 in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
4419 after connection. It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
4420 time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
4421 @code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
4422 @code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
4423 @code{to_mourn_inferior}). The target should also make sure to call
4424 @code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
4425 target to inactive state.
4426
4427 @node Existing Targets
4428 @section Existing Targets
4429 @cindex targets
4430
4431 @subsection File Targets
4432
4433 Both executables and core files have target vectors.
4434
4435 @subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
4436
4437 @value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code
4438 that runs in the target system. @value{GDBN} provides several sample
4439 @dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
4440 systems for this purpose; they are named @file{*-stub.c}.
4441
4442 The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
4443 your target code. What follows is a discussion of integrating the
4444 SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
4445 program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
4446
4447 The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
4448 @code{trap_low}:
4449
4450 @enumerate
4451 @item
4452 %l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
4453
4454 @item
4455 traps are disabled;
4456
4457 @item
4458 you are in the correct trap window.
4459 @end enumerate
4460
4461 As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
4462 is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
4463 The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
4464 hardware trap vector. That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
4465 which is provided by the external environment. For instance, this could
4466 set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
4467 first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
4468
4469 For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
4470 ``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
4471 and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions. Anyway, this is all
4472 controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify. The most important
4473 trap for us is for @code{ta 1}. Without that, we can't single step or
4474 do breakpoints. Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
4475 of the debugger/stub.
4476
4477 From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
4478 They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
4479
4480 @subsection ROM Monitor Interface
4481
4482 @subsection Custom Protocols
4483
4484 @subsection Transport Layer
4485
4486 @subsection Builtin Simulator
4487
4488
4489 @node Native Debugging
4490
4491 @chapter Native Debugging
4492 @cindex native debugging
4493
4494 Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
4495
4496 @table @file
4497 @vindex NATDEPFILES
4498 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
4499 Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
4500 machine @var{xyz}. In particular, this lists the required
4501 native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
4502 Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
4503 @var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}. You can also
4504 define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
4505 @samp{NAT_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
4506
4507 @emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
4508 originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
4509 on machine @var{xyz}. While the file is no longer used for this
4510 purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains. Perhaps someone will
4511 eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
4512 suffix.}
4513
4514 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
4515 (@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains C
4516 macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
4517 child process control and core file support.
4518
4519 @item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
4520 Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
4521 this machine. On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
4522 @end table
4523
4524 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
4525 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
4526 defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
4527 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
4528 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4529
4530 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
4531 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
4532 Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
4533 into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4534
4535 @table @file
4536 @item inftarg.c
4537 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4538 processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
4539
4540 @item procfs.c
4541 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4542 processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
4543
4544 @item fork-child.c
4545 This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
4546 and exec'' to start up a child process.
4547
4548 @item infptrace.c
4549 This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
4550 the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
4551 @end table
4552
4553 @section Native core file Support
4554 @cindex native core files
4555
4556 @table @file
4557 @findex fetch_core_registers
4558 @item core-aout.c::fetch_core_registers()
4559 Support for reading registers out of a core file. This routine calls
4560 @code{register_addr()}, see below. Now that BFD is used to read core
4561 files, virtually all machines should use @code{core-aout.c}, and should
4562 just provide @code{fetch_core_registers} in @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} (or
4563 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} in @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h}).
4564
4565 @item core-aout.c::register_addr()
4566 If your @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file defines the macro
4567 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR(addr, blockend, regno)}, it should be defined to
4568 set @code{addr} to the offset within the @samp{user} struct of @value{GDBN}
4569 register number @code{regno}. @code{blockend} is the offset within the
4570 ``upage'' of @code{u.u_ar0}. If @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} is defined,
4571 @file{core-aout.c} will define the @code{register_addr()} function and
4572 use the macro in it. If you do not define @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR}, but
4573 you are using the standard @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you will need
4574 to define your own version of @code{register_addr()}, put it into your
4575 @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file, and be sure @code{@var{xyz}-nat.o} is in
4576 the @code{NATDEPFILES} list. If you have your own
4577 @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you may not need a separate
4578 @code{register_addr()}. Many custom @code{fetch_core_registers()}
4579 implementations simply locate the registers themselves.@refill
4580 @end table
4581
4582 When making @value{GDBN} run native on a new operating system, to make it
4583 possible to debug core files, you will need to either write specific
4584 code for parsing your OS's core files, or customize
4585 @file{bfd/trad-core.c}. First, use whatever @code{#include} files your
4586 machine uses to define the struct of registers that is accessible
4587 (possibly in the u-area) in a core file (rather than
4588 @file{machine/reg.h}), and an include file that defines whatever header
4589 exists on a core file (e.g., the u-area or a @code{struct core}). Then
4590 modify @code{trad_unix_core_file_p} to use these values to set up the
4591 section information for the data segment, stack segment, any other
4592 segments in the core file (perhaps shared library contents or control
4593 information), ``registers'' segment, and if there are two discontiguous
4594 sets of registers (e.g., integer and float), the ``reg2'' segment. This
4595 section information basically delimits areas in the core file in a
4596 standard way, which the section-reading routines in BFD know how to seek
4597 around in.
4598
4599 Then back in @value{GDBN}, you need a matching routine called
4600 @code{fetch_core_registers}. If you can use the generic one, it's in
4601 @file{core-aout.c}; if not, it's in your @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file.
4602 It will be passed a char pointer to the entire ``registers'' segment,
4603 its length, and a zero; or a char pointer to the entire ``regs2''
4604 segment, its length, and a 2. The routine should suck out the supplied
4605 register values and install them into @value{GDBN}'s ``registers'' array.
4606
4607 If your system uses @file{/proc} to control processes, and uses ELF
4608 format core files, then you may be able to use the same routines for
4609 reading the registers out of processes and out of core files.
4610
4611 @section ptrace
4612
4613 @section /proc
4614
4615 @section win32
4616
4617 @section shared libraries
4618
4619 @section Native Conditionals
4620 @cindex native conditionals
4621
4622 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
4623 defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
4624 target systems are the same. These macros should be defined (or left
4625 undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
4626
4627 @table @code
4628
4629 @item CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4630 @findex CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4631 If the machine stores all registers at once in the child process, then
4632 define this to ensure that all values are correct. This usually entails
4633 a read from the child.
4634
4635 [Note that this is incorrectly defined in @file{xm-@var{system}.h} files
4636 currently.]
4637
4638 @item FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4639 @findex FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4640 Define this if the native-dependent code will provide its own routines
4641 @code{fetch_inferior_registers} and @code{store_inferior_registers} in
4642 @file{@var{host}-nat.c}. If this symbol is @emph{not} defined, and
4643 @file{infptrace.c} is included in this configuration, the default
4644 routines in @file{infptrace.c} are used for these functions.
4645
4646 @item int gdbarch_fp0_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4647 @findex gdbarch_fp0_regnum
4648 This functions normally returns the number of the first floating
4649 point register, if the machine has such registers. As such, it would
4650 appear only in target-specific code. However, @file{/proc} support uses this
4651 to decide whether floats are in use on this target.
4652
4653 @item int gdbarch_get_longjmp_target (@var{gdbarch})
4654 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4655 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
4656 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
4657 @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
4658
4659 This function determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
4660 assuming that we have just stopped at a longjmp breakpoint. It takes a
4661 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
4662 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
4663
4664 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4665 An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4666 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4667
4668 @item ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4669 @findex ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4670 Define this to be able to, when a breakpoint insertion fails, warn the
4671 user that another process may be running with the same executable.
4672
4673 @item PROC_NAME_FMT
4674 @findex PROC_NAME_FMT
4675 Defines the format for the name of a @file{/proc} device. Should be
4676 defined in @file{nm.h} @emph{only} in order to override the default
4677 definition in @file{procfs.c}.
4678
4679 @item SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4680 @findex SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4681 If defined, is a string to prefix on the shell command used to start the
4682 inferior.
4683
4684 @item SHELL_FILE
4685 @findex SHELL_FILE
4686 If defined, this is the name of the shell to use to run the inferior.
4687 Defaults to @code{"/bin/sh"}.
4688
4689 @item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
4690 @findex SOLIB_ADD
4691 Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
4692 @var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table. If
4693 @var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
4694 processing for @var{filename} is still done.
4695
4696 @item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4697 @findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4698 Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
4699 want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
4700
4701 @item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4702 @findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4703 When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
4704 twice; once when
4705 the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs. If the actual
4706 number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
4707 expand into the number expected.
4708
4709 @item CLEAR_SOLIB
4710 @findex CLEAR_SOLIB
4711 See @file{objfiles.c}.
4712
4713 @end table
4714
4715 @node Support Libraries
4716
4717 @chapter Support Libraries
4718
4719 @section BFD
4720 @cindex BFD library
4721
4722 BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
4723
4724 @table @emph
4725 @item identifying executable and core files
4726 BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
4727 several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
4728
4729 @item access to sections of files
4730 BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
4731 sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
4732 (such as the text section or the data section). @value{GDBN} simply
4733 calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
4734 length @var{z}.
4735
4736 @item specialized core file support
4737 BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
4738 core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
4739 file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
4740 file.
4741
4742 @item locating the symbol information
4743 @value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
4744 symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file. @value{GDBN} itself
4745 handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
4746 symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
4747 string table, etc.
4748 @end table
4749
4750 @section opcodes
4751 @cindex opcodes library
4752
4753 The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler. (It's a separate
4754 library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
4755
4756 @section readline
4757 @cindex readline library
4758 The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
4759 that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
4760
4761 @section libiberty
4762 @cindex @code{libiberty} library
4763
4764 The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
4765 that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
4766 systems. Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
4767 groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
4768 environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
4769 a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
4770 functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
4771 beyond standard functions).
4772
4773 @value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
4774 library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
4775 floating format support functions, the input options parser
4776 @samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
4777
4778 @subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
4779 @cindex @code{obstacks}
4780
4781 The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
4782 chunks of memory. Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
4783 like a stack. Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
4784 allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
4785 @code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
4786 @code{obstacks}).
4787
4788 The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
4789 object files. There is an obstack associated with each internal
4790 representation of an object file. Lots of things get allocated on
4791 these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
4792 symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
4793 fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
4794 offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
4795 string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
4796 information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
4797 unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data. Plus
4798 various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
4799 names of types.
4800
4801 An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
4802 that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
4803 various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
4804 once using the @code{obstack_free} function. The @code{obstack_free}
4805 function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
4806 deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
4807 start the cleanups). Because of the stack like structure of the
4808 @code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
4809 obstack. There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
4810 happens. Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
4811 is allocated to the obstack. Only the local data is deleted from the
4812 obstack. Of course this assumes that nothing between the
4813 @code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
4814 else on the same obstack. For this reason it is best and safest to
4815 use temporary @code{obstacks}.
4816
4817 Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se. It is safe only
4818 under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
4819 longer needed. In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
4820 when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
4821 new symbol file.
4822
4823 @section gnu-regex
4824 @cindex regular expressions library
4825
4826 Regex conditionals.
4827
4828 @table @code
4829 @item C_ALLOCA
4830
4831 @item NFAILURES
4832
4833 @item RE_NREGS
4834
4835 @item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
4836
4837 @item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
4838
4839 @item SYNTAX_TABLE
4840
4841 @item Sword
4842
4843 @item sparc
4844 @end table
4845
4846 @section Array Containers
4847 @cindex Array Containers
4848 @cindex VEC
4849
4850 Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
4851 objects. C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
4852 and repetitive. The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
4853 and using a typesafe vector type. The functions defined will be
4854 inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
4855 Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
4856
4857 An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
4858 The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
4859 the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
4860 bookkeeping. Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
4861 accidentally mixing up the contents. Think of these as C++ templates,
4862 but implemented in C.
4863
4864 Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
4865 and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
4866 these variants. Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
4867 pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
4868 stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
4869 dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector. The scalar
4870 object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
4871 elements are returned by value.
4872
4873 There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors. The iterator
4874 returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
4875 variable passed by reference. Because the iterator will be inlined,
4876 the address-of can be optimized away.
4877
4878 The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
4879 are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
4880 itself. This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
4881 --- always use a pointer to a vector. The one exception is the final
4882 field of a structure, which could be a vector type. You will have to
4883 use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
4884 such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
4885 the @dfn{safe} allocation variants). The trailing array idiom is used
4886 (rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
4887 @code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
4888 minimal space in the structure containing them.
4889
4890 Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
4891 available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants. The former presumes
4892 that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
4893 (it dies if there is not). The latter will reallocate the vector, if
4894 needed. Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
4895 If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
4896 to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
4897 @dfn{quick} operation. This will ensure there are at least as many
4898 elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
4899 too few spare slots. If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
4900 but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
4901 is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation. You
4902 can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
4903
4904 You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
4905 remove from the end of the vector. If you need to remove several items
4906 in one go, use the truncate operation. The insert and remove
4907 operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
4908 There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
4909 ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
4910 @code{unordered_remove}. The latter function copies the end element
4911 into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation. The
4912 @code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
4913 the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
4914
4915 If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
4916 accessor will return the address of the start of the vector. Also the
4917 @code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
4918 vector. You will not normally need to use these two functions.
4919
4920 Vector types are defined using a
4921 @code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro. Variables of vector
4922 type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro. The
4923 characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
4924 @var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
4925 (@code{I}) type. Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
4926 awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one. There is a
4927 check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
4928 @code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
4929 that is not possible in plain C.
4930
4931 An example of their use would be,
4932
4933 @smallexample
4934 DEF_VEC_P(tree); // non-managed tree vector.
4935
4936 struct my_struct @{
4937 VEC(tree) *v; // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
4938 @};
4939
4940 struct my_struct *s;
4941
4942 if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
4943 VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
4944 for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
4945 @{ do something with elt @}
4946
4947 @end smallexample
4948
4949 The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
4950 accessors provided. They are enumerated here:
4951
4952 @table @code
4953 @item VEC_length
4954 Return the number of items in the array,
4955
4956 @item VEC_empty
4957 Return true if the array has no elements.
4958
4959 @item VEC_last
4960 @itemx VEC_index
4961 Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
4962
4963 @item VEC_iterate
4964 Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
4965 traversed.
4966
4967 @item VEC_alloc
4968 @itemx VEC_free
4969 Create and destroy an array.
4970
4971 @item VEC_embedded_size
4972 @itemx VEC_embedded_init
4973 Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
4974
4975 @item VEC_copy
4976 Duplicate an array.
4977
4978 @item VEC_space
4979 Return the amount of free space in an array.
4980
4981 @item VEC_reserve
4982 Ensure a certain amount of free space.
4983
4984 @item VEC_quick_push
4985 @itemx VEC_safe_push
4986 Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
4987 sure that it is.
4988
4989 @item VEC_pop
4990 Remove the last item from an array.
4991
4992 @item VEC_truncate
4993 Remove several items from the end of an array.
4994
4995 @item VEC_safe_grow
4996 Add several items to the end of an array.
4997
4998 @item VEC_replace
4999 Overwrite an item in the array.
5000
5001 @item VEC_quick_insert
5002 @itemx VEC_safe_insert
5003 Insert an item into the middle of the array. Either the space must
5004 already exist, or the space is created.
5005
5006 @item VEC_ordered_remove
5007 @itemx VEC_unordered_remove
5008 Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
5009
5010 @item VEC_block_remove
5011 Remove a set of items from the array.
5012
5013 @item VEC_address
5014 Provide the address of the first element.
5015
5016 @item VEC_lower_bound
5017 Binary search the array.
5018
5019 @end table
5020
5021 @section include
5022
5023 @node Coding
5024
5025 @chapter Coding
5026
5027 This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
5028 algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
5029
5030 @section Cleanups
5031 @cindex cleanups
5032
5033 Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
5034 later.
5035
5036 When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
5037 @code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
5038 the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup. The
5039 cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
5040 and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
5041 is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
5042 cleanups. Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
5043 created.
5044
5045 Syntax:
5046
5047 @table @code
5048 @item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
5049 Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
5050
5051 @findex make_cleanup
5052 @item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
5053 Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
5054 @var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later. The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
5055 handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
5056 @code{discard_cleanups}. Unless you are going to call
5057 @code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
5058 from @code{make_cleanup}.
5059
5060 @findex do_cleanups
5061 @item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5062 Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
5063 @code{make_cleanup} call was made.
5064
5065 @findex discard_cleanups
5066 @item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5067 Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
5068 the chain and does not call the specified functions.
5069 @end table
5070
5071 Cleanups are implemented as a chain. The handle returned by
5072 @code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
5073 later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
5074 performed). E.g.:
5075
5076 @smallexample
5077 make_cleanup (a, 0);
5078 @{
5079 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
5080 make_cleanup (c, 0)
5081 ...
5082 do_cleanups (old);
5083 @}
5084 @end smallexample
5085
5086 @noindent
5087 will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}. The
5088 cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
5089 be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
5090
5091 Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
5092 Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
5093 will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups. This need leads
5094 to two common cleanup styles.
5095
5096 The first style is try/finally. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5097 @code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
5098 code-block's cleanups are always performed. For instance, the following
5099 code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
5100 called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
5101 @code{xfree} will always be called:
5102
5103 @smallexample
5104 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
5105 data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
5106 make_cleanup (xfree, data);
5107 ... blah blah ...
5108 do_cleanups (old);
5109 @end smallexample
5110
5111 The second style is try/except. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5112 @code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
5113 any created cleanups are not performed. For instance, the following
5114 code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
5115 an error:
5116
5117 @smallexample
5118 FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
5119 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
5120 ... blah blah ...
5121 discard_cleanups (old);
5122 return file;
5123 @end smallexample
5124
5125 Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
5126 that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''. This
5127 means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
5128 interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
5129 functions, since they might never return to your code (they
5130 @samp{longjmp} instead).
5131
5132 @section Per-architecture module data
5133 @cindex per-architecture module data
5134 @cindex multi-arch data
5135 @cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
5136
5137 The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
5138 specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
5139 architecture object.
5140
5141 A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
5142
5143 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
5144 @var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
5145 per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
5146 in as a parameter). Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
5147 architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
5148 and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
5149 @end deftypefun
5150
5151 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
5152 @var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
5153 per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}. Since @var{post_init} is
5154 always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
5155 initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
5156 per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
5157 other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
5158 create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
5159 @end deftypefun
5160
5161 These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
5162 identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
5163
5164 The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
5165
5166 @deftypefun void *gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
5167 Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
5168 @var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
5169 or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
5170 current value of the per-architecture data-pointer. If the data
5171 pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
5172 corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
5173 @end deftypefun
5174
5175 The examples below assume the following definitions:
5176
5177 @smallexample
5178 struct nozel @{ int total; @};
5179 static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
5180 @end smallexample
5181
5182 A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
5183 per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method. The module's
5184 per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
5185 creation.
5186
5187 In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added. An
5188 architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
5189 from @code{gdbarch_init}.
5190
5191 @smallexample
5192 static void *
5193 nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
5194 @{
5195 struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
5196 return data;
5197 @}
5198 @end smallexample
5199
5200 @smallexample
5201 extern void
5202 set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
5203 @{
5204 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5205 data->total = nozel;
5206 @}
5207 @end smallexample
5208
5209 A module can on-demand create architecture dependant data structures
5210 using @code{post_init}.
5211
5212 In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
5213 @code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
5214 architecture.
5215
5216 @smallexample
5217 static void *
5218 nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5219 @{
5220 struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
5221 nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
5222 return data;
5223 @}
5224 @end smallexample
5225
5226 @smallexample
5227 extern int
5228 nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5229 @{
5230 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5231 return data->total;
5232 @}
5233 @end smallexample
5234
5235 @section Wrapping Output Lines
5236 @cindex line wrap in output
5237
5238 @findex wrap_here
5239 Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
5240 or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
5241 added in places that would be good breaking points. The utility
5242 routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
5243 exceeded.
5244
5245 The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
5246 printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there. This argument is saved
5247 away and used later. It must remain valid until the next call to
5248 @code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
5249 @code{*_filtered} functions. Don't pass in a local variable and then
5250 return!
5251
5252 It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
5253 space. If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
5254 indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
5255 the line wraps there.
5256
5257 Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
5258 finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
5259 to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output. Symbol reading routines that
5260 print warnings are a good example.
5261
5262 @section @value{GDBN} Coding Standards
5263 @cindex coding standards
5264
5265 @value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
5266 @file{etc/standards.texi}. This file is also available for anonymous
5267 FTP from GNU archive sites. @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
5268 of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
5269 but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
5270
5271 @value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
5272 @value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
5273
5274
5275 @subsection ISO C
5276
5277 @value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
5278 compiler.
5279
5280 @value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
5281
5282
5283 @subsection Memory Management
5284
5285 @value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
5286 @code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
5287
5288 @value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
5289 @code{xcalloc} when allocating memory. Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
5290 these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty. Instead,
5291 they unwind the stack using cleanups. These functions return
5292 @code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
5293
5294 @emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
5295 memory allocation is removed. These functions provide portable
5296 behavior.}
5297
5298 @value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
5299
5300 @value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
5301 memory pool. Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
5302 free a @code{NULL} pointer.
5303
5304 @emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
5305 @code{NULL} pointer.}
5306
5307 @value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
5308 allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
5309
5310 @emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable. Some systems
5311 restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
5312
5313 @value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
5314 function @code{xstrprintf}.
5315
5316 @emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail. Print
5317 functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
5318 errors.}
5319
5320
5321 @subsection Compiler Warnings
5322 @cindex compiler warnings
5323
5324 With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
5325 @samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}. The exceptions
5326 are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}. The default, when
5327 building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
5328
5329 This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
5330 with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags. Any warnings
5331 from those flags are treated as errors.
5332
5333 The current list of warning flags includes:
5334
5335 @table @samp
5336 @item -Wall
5337 Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
5338
5339 @item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
5340
5341 @sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
5342 code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
5343
5344 @item -Wpointer-arith
5345
5346 @item -Wformat-nonliteral
5347 Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
5348 might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
5349 Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
5350 @code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
5351 but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
5352
5353 @item -Wno-pointer-sign
5354 In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
5355 assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
5356 signedness. However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
5357 carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}. In early 2006
5358 the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
5359 worth the time it would take.
5360
5361 @item -Wno-unused-parameter
5362 Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
5363 unused parameters. Consequently this warning is avoided. The macro
5364 @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
5365 it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
5366 is being used.
5367
5368 @item -Wno-unused
5369 @itemx -Wno-switch
5370 @itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
5371 These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
5372 currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
5373
5374 @end table
5375
5376 @subsection Formatting
5377
5378 @cindex source code formatting
5379 The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
5380 strictly.
5381
5382 A function declaration should not have its name in column zero. A
5383 function definition should have its name in column zero.
5384
5385 @smallexample
5386 /* Declaration */
5387 static void foo (void);
5388 /* Definition */
5389 void
5390 foo (void)
5391 @{
5392 @}
5393 @end smallexample
5394
5395 @emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting. Function definitions can
5396 be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
5397
5398 There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
5399 parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
5400 required by C). There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
5401 or before a close paren/bracket.
5402
5403 While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
5404 more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
5405 after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
5406 whitespace after the semicolon). Excess whitespace causes difficulties
5407 for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
5408
5409 Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
5410
5411 @smallexample
5412 void *foo;
5413 @end smallexample
5414
5415 @noindent
5416 and not:
5417
5418 @smallexample
5419 void * foo;
5420 void* foo;
5421 @end smallexample
5422
5423 @subsection Comments
5424
5425 @cindex comment formatting
5426 The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
5427
5428 Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
5429 @code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
5430
5431 @smallexample
5432 /* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger. If inferior
5433 gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
5434 returning. That is why there is a loop in this function. When
5435 this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
5436 stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands. */
5437 @end smallexample
5438
5439 (Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
5440 comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
5441
5442 Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
5443 variable definitions, and the definition itself.
5444
5445 In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
5446 than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
5447 line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
5448 than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
5449
5450 @subsection C Usage
5451
5452 @cindex C data types
5453 Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
5454 host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
5455 of evaluation of expressions.
5456
5457 @cindex function usage
5458 Use functions freely. There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
5459 in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
5460 call, mainly in symbol reading. Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
5461 limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
5462
5463 However, use functions with moderation. A thousand one-line functions
5464 are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
5465
5466 @emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
5467 (But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
5468 protected with parentheses.)
5469
5470 @cindex types
5471
5472 Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
5473 declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
5474
5475
5476 @subsection Function Prototypes
5477 @cindex function prototypes
5478
5479 Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
5480 a function. Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
5481 argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
5482 function definition.
5483
5484 All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
5485 callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
5486 be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
5487 visible to random source files.
5488
5489 Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
5490 that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
5491
5492
5493 @subsection Internal Error Recovery
5494
5495 During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
5496 User errors and internal errors. User errors include not only a user
5497 entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
5498 object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
5499 Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
5500 run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
5501
5502 When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
5503 @code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
5504
5505 @value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
5506
5507 @emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function. Either
5508 the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
5509 @code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
5510 error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
5511
5512 @subsection File Names
5513
5514 Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
5515 case. Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
5516 unique. These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
5517
5518 @emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
5519 platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS. Every time an unfriendly file
5520 is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
5521 @file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly. Compare the
5522 convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
5523 @file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
5524 @file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
5525
5526 Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
5527 of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5528
5529 @emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
5530
5531 When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
5532 @file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
5533 @file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}). These headers should be relatively
5534 independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
5535 the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
5536 should refer only to system types. They may be shared between multiple
5537 programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
5538
5539 For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
5540
5541
5542 @subsection Include Files
5543
5544 A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
5545
5546 A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5547 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5548 indirect inclusion.
5549
5550 A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5551 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5552 indirect inclusion. Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
5553 be directly included.
5554
5555 An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
5556
5557 An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
5558 Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
5559 pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
5560
5561 A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
5562
5563 An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
5564 files. Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
5565 @code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
5566
5567 All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
5568
5569 @smallexample
5570 #ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5571 #define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5572 header body
5573 #endif
5574 @end smallexample
5575
5576
5577 @subsection Clean Design and Portable Implementation
5578
5579 @cindex design
5580 In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
5581 semantics. Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
5582 experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
5583 trouble.
5584
5585 @cindex assumptions about targets
5586 You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
5587 (including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions). Such things
5588 must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
5589 @value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
5590 such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
5591
5592 You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
5593 the target system. All references to the target must go through the
5594 current @code{target_ops} vector.
5595
5596 You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
5597 (except in the ``native'' support modules). In particular, you can't
5598 assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
5599 host machine. Target code must bring along its own header files --
5600 written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
5601 copyright problems.
5602
5603 @cindex portability
5604 Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon. It's much better
5605 to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
5606 systems.
5607
5608 @cindex system dependencies
5609 New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
5610 or operating systems are unacceptable. All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
5611 for features. The information about which configurations contain which
5612 features should be segregated into the configuration files. Experience
5613 has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
5614 often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
5615 predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
5616 time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
5617 with regard to this feature.
5618
5619 Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
5620 target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
5621
5622 @cindex portable file name handling
5623 @cindex file names, portability
5624 One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
5625 creep in is handling of file names. The mainline @value{GDBN} code
5626 assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
5627 a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
5628 directories, case-sensitive file names. These assumptions are not
5629 necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows. To avoid
5630 system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
5631 name, use the following portable macros:
5632
5633 @table @code
5634 @findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5635 @item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5636 This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
5637 whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family. Use this
5638 symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
5639 such hosts.
5640
5641 @findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
5642 @item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
5643 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
5644 character. On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
5645 such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
5646 pass.
5647
5648 @findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
5649 @item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
5650 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
5651 For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
5652 @file{/} is absolute. On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
5653 @file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
5654
5655 @findex FILENAME_CMP
5656 @item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
5657 Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
5658 appropriate for the underlying host filesystem. For Posix systems,
5659 this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
5660 will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
5661
5662 @findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5663 @item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5664 Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
5665 @code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
5666 This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
5667
5668 @findex SLASH_STRING
5669 @item SLASH_STRING
5670 This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
5671 absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
5672 @code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
5673 @code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
5674 @end table
5675
5676 In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
5677 functions whenever possible. For example, to extract a directory or a
5678 basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
5679 @code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
5680 platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
5681 with @code{strrchr}.
5682
5683 Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
5684 attribute struct. For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
5685 multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
5686 by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
5687 well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references). Whenever
5688 something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
5689 using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
5690 @code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
5691 current target_ops structure. In this way, when a new remote interface
5692 is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
5693 implements the new remote interface. Other examples of
5694 attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
5695 formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
5696
5697 Please avoid duplicating code. For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
5698 the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
5699 @value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
5700 something was very painful. In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
5701 consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}. @file{infptrace.c} can deal
5702 with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
5703 file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
5704 radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
5705
5706 All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
5707 @var{module}} command. Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
5708 messages. Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}. Do not use
5709 @code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
5710
5711
5712 @node Porting GDB
5713
5714 @chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
5715 @cindex porting to new machines
5716
5717 Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
5718 specifying the configuration of the machine. This is done in a
5719 dizzying variety of header files and configuration scripts, which we
5720 hope to make more sensible soon. Let's say your new host is called an
5721 @var{xyz} (e.g., @samp{sun4}), and its full three-part configuration
5722 name is @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}} (e.g.,
5723 @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}). In particular:
5724
5725 @itemize @bullet
5726 @item
5727 In the top level directory, edit @file{config.sub} and add @var{arch},
5728 @var{xvend}, and @var{xos} to the lists of supported architectures,
5729 vendors, and operating systems near the bottom of the file. Also, add
5730 @var{xyz} as an alias that maps to
5731 @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}. You can test your changes by
5732 running
5733
5734 @smallexample
5735 ./config.sub @var{xyz}
5736 @end smallexample
5737
5738 @noindent
5739 and
5740
5741 @smallexample
5742 ./config.sub @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5743 @end smallexample
5744
5745 @noindent
5746 which should both respond with @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5747 and no error messages.
5748
5749 @noindent
5750 You need to port BFD, if that hasn't been done already. Porting BFD is
5751 beyond the scope of this manual.
5752
5753 @item
5754 To configure @value{GDBN} itself, edit @file{gdb/configure.host} to recognize
5755 your system and set @code{gdb_host} to @var{xyz}, and (unless your
5756 desired target is already available) also edit @file{gdb/configure.tgt},
5757 setting @code{gdb_target} to something appropriate (for instance,
5758 @var{xyz}).
5759
5760 @emph{Maintainer's note: Work in progress. The file
5761 @file{gdb/configure.host} originally needed to be modified when either a
5762 new native target or a new host machine was being added to @value{GDBN}.
5763 Recent changes have removed this requirement. The file now only needs
5764 to be modified when adding a new native configuration. This will likely
5765 changed again in the future.}
5766
5767 @item
5768 Finally, you'll need to specify and define @value{GDBN}'s host-, native-, and
5769 target-dependent @file{.h} and @file{.c} files used for your
5770 configuration.
5771 @end itemize
5772
5773 @node Versions and Branches
5774 @chapter Versions and Branches
5775
5776 @section Versions
5777
5778 @value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
5779 @file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
5780
5781 @table @asis
5782 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}
5783 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
5784 an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
5785 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5786 a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
5787 6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
5788 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
5789 a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
5790 6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
5791 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
5792 a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
5793 @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
5794 may include additional changes
5795 @end table
5796
5797 @value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
5798 numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
5799 of 50. At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
5800 @var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
5801
5802 @value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar. When the branch is cut, the
5803 @var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90. As draft releases are
5804 drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented. Once the
5805 first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
5806 @var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
5807 @var{patchlevel}.
5808
5809 For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
5810 identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
5811
5812 @table @asis
5813 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5814 drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
5815 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5816 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5817 drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
5818 6.1.90.20020304)
5819 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5820 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5821 drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
5822 @end table
5823
5824 If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
5825 6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
5826 here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
5827
5828 @smallexample
5829 <HEAD>
5830 |
5831 6.1.50.20020302-cvs
5832 |
5833 +--------------------------.
5834 | <gdb_6_2-branch>
5835 | |
5836 6.2.50.20020303-cvs 6.1.90 (draft #1)
5837 | |
5838 6.2.50.20020304-cvs 6.1.90.20020304-cvs
5839 | |
5840 6.2.50.20020305-cvs 6.1.91 (draft #2)
5841 | |
5842 6.2.50.20020306-cvs 6.1.91.20020306-cvs
5843 | |
5844 6.2.50.20020307-cvs 6.2 (release)
5845 | |
5846 6.2.50.20020308-cvs 6.2.0.20020308-cvs
5847 | |
5848 6.2.50.20020309-cvs 6.2.1 (update)
5849 | |
5850 6.2.50.20020310-cvs <branch closed>
5851 |
5852 6.2.50.20020311-cvs
5853 |
5854 +--------------------------.
5855 | <gdb_6_3-branch>
5856 | |
5857 6.3.50.20020312-cvs 6.2.90 (draft #1)
5858 | |
5859 @end smallexample
5860
5861 @section Release Branches
5862 @cindex Release Branches
5863
5864 @value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
5865 single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
5866 branch tags:
5867
5868 @smallexample
5869 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
5870 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
5871 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
5872 @end smallexample
5873
5874 @emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
5875 release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
5876 date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag. The
5877 branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
5878
5879 @section Vendor Branches
5880 @cindex vendor branches
5881
5882 To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
5883 @file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
5884 (an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
5885 its version identifier). E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
5886 Inc Patch 2)}.
5887
5888 @section Experimental Branches
5889 @cindex experimental branches
5890
5891 @subsection Guidelines
5892
5893 @value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
5894 repository, for experimental development. Branches make it possible
5895 for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
5896 significant new developments.
5897
5898 The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
5899
5900 @table @emph
5901
5902 @item a branch has an owner
5903 The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
5904 ground rules. In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
5905 adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
5906
5907 @item all commits are posted
5908 All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
5909 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} patches
5910 mailing list}. While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
5911 should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
5912
5913 @item all commits are covered by an assignment
5914 This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
5915 and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
5916
5917 @item a branch is focused
5918 A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
5919 unnecessary or irrelevant changes. Cleanups, where identified, being
5920 be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
5921
5922 @item a branch tracks mainline
5923 This keeps the level of divergence under control. It also keeps the
5924 pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
5925 mainline.
5926
5927 @item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
5928 The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
5929 branch (branches of individual files should be avoided). @xref{Tags}.
5930
5931 @item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
5932 The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
5933 the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
5934 @samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
5935
5936 @end table
5937
5938 @subsection Tags
5939 @anchor{Tags}
5940
5941 To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
5942 branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
5943
5944 @table @code
5945
5946 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
5947 @itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
5948 The branch point and corresponding branch tag. @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
5949 date that the branch was created. A branch is created using the
5950 sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
5951 @smallexample
5952 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
5953 cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
5954 @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
5955 @end smallexample
5956
5957 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
5958 The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
5959 on @var{yyyymmdd}. To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
5960 use a command sequence like:
5961 @smallexample
5962 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
5963 cvs update \
5964 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
5965 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
5966 @end smallexample
5967 @noindent
5968 Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
5969 merge.
5970
5971 @end table
5972
5973 @noindent
5974 For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
5975 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
5976
5977 @node Start of New Year Procedure
5978 @chapter Start of New Year Procedure
5979 @cindex new year procedure
5980
5981 At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
5982
5983 @itemize @bullet
5984 @item
5985 Rotate the ChangeLog file
5986
5987 The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
5988 @file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
5989 A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
5990 contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog. The following should
5991 also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
5992 the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
5993 @smallexample
5994 Local Variables:
5995 mode: change-log
5996 left-margin: 8
5997 fill-column: 74
5998 version-control: never
5999 End:
6000 @end smallexample
6001
6002 @item
6003 Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
6004 in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6005
6006 @item
6007 Update the copyright year in the startup message
6008
6009 Update the copyright year in file @file{top.c}, function
6010 @code{print_gdb_version}.
6011 @end itemize
6012
6013 @node Releasing GDB
6014
6015 @chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
6016 @cindex making a new release of gdb
6017
6018 @section Branch Commit Policy
6019
6020 The branch commit policy is pretty slack. @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
6021 5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
6022
6023 @itemize @bullet
6024 @item
6025 The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
6026 @item
6027 Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
6028 trunk. If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
6029 file is better than committing a hack.
6030 @item
6031 When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
6032 Does it fix a build? Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
6033 when debugging a static binary?
6034 @item
6035 The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6036 the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6037 @item
6038 Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6039 sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6040 @file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6041 @end itemize
6042
6043 @emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6044 functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6045 This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6046 reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6047
6048
6049 @section Obsoleting code
6050
6051 Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6052 code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6053 (an old target, an unused file).
6054
6055 Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6056 line. Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6057 been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6058
6059 The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6060 wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6061 Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6062
6063 @enumerate
6064 @item
6065 Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB mailing
6066 list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6067 recommended.
6068 @item
6069 Wait a week or so.
6070 @item
6071 Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB
6072 Announcement mailing list}.
6073 @item
6074 Wait a week or so.
6075 @item
6076 Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6077 prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6078 @item
6079 Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6080 released.
6081 @item
6082 Remove the obsolete code.
6083 @end enumerate
6084
6085 @noindent
6086 @emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6087 hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development. Firstly it
6088 helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6089 or simply wrong. Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6090 the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6091 hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6092
6093
6094
6095 @section Before the Branch
6096
6097 The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6098 changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created. For
6099 instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6100 building. If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6101 @file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6102
6103 @subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6104
6105 People always forget. Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6106 something interesting happened add it yourself. The @code{schedule}
6107 script will mention this in its e-mail.
6108
6109 @subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6110
6111 Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6112 @file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved. The
6113 @code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6114
6115 @subheading Refresh any imported files.
6116
6117 A number of files are taken from external repositories. They include:
6118
6119 @itemize @bullet
6120 @item
6121 @file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6122 @item
6123 @file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6124 file)
6125 @item
6126 @file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6127 @end itemize
6128
6129 @subheading Check the ARI
6130
6131 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6132 (Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6133 conventions. The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6134 of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems. There shouldn't be any
6135 regressions.
6136
6137 @subsection Review the bug data base
6138
6139 Close anything obviously fixed.
6140
6141 @subsection Check all cross targets build
6142
6143 The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6144
6145
6146 @section Cut the Branch
6147
6148 @subheading Create the branch
6149
6150 @smallexample
6151 $ u=5.1
6152 $ v=5.2
6153 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6154 $ D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6155 $ echo $u $V $D
6156 5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6157 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6158 -D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6159 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag
6160 -D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6161 $ ^echo ^^
6162 ...
6163 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6164 -b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6165 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6166 -b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6167 $ ^echo ^^
6168 ...
6169 $
6170 @end smallexample
6171
6172 @itemize @bullet
6173 @item
6174 By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6175 date/time.
6176 @item
6177 The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6178 @item
6179 Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6180 @item
6181 @file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6182 @item
6183 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6184 @end itemize
6185
6186 @subheading Update @file{version.in}
6187
6188 @smallexample
6189 $ u=5.1
6190 $ v=5.2
6191 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6192 $ echo $u $v$V
6193 5.1 5_2
6194 $ cd /tmp
6195 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co \
6196 -r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
6197 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co
6198 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
6199 $ ^echo ^^
6200 U src/gdb/version.in
6201 $ cd src/gdb
6202 $ echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
6203 $ cat version.in
6204 5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
6205 $ cvs -f commit version.in
6206 @end smallexample
6207
6208 @itemize @bullet
6209 @item
6210 @file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
6211 mechanism.
6212 @item
6213 @file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
6214 initial branch version number.
6215 @end itemize
6216
6217
6218 @subheading Update the web and news pages
6219
6220 Something?
6221
6222 @subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
6223
6224 The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
6225 This file needs to be updated so that:
6226
6227 @itemize @bullet
6228 @item
6229 A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
6230 @item
6231 The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
6232 @end itemize
6233
6234 @noindent
6235 See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
6236 cron table.
6237
6238 The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
6239 any changes. That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
6240 snapshot directories.
6241
6242
6243 @subheading Update the NEWS and README files
6244
6245 The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
6246 to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
6247 refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
6248
6249 The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
6250 current release.
6251
6252 @subheading Post the branch info
6253
6254 Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
6255
6256 @itemize @bullet
6257 @item
6258 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6259 @item
6260 @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
6261 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Testers mailing list}
6262 @end itemize
6263
6264 @emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
6265 ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
6266 list are alerted.}
6267
6268 The announcement should include:
6269
6270 @itemize @bullet
6271 @item
6272 The branch tag.
6273 @item
6274 How to check out the branch using CVS.
6275 @item
6276 The date/number of weeks until the release.
6277 @item
6278 The branch commit policy still holds.
6279 @end itemize
6280
6281 @section Stabilize the branch
6282
6283 Something goes here.
6284
6285 @section Create a Release
6286
6287 The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
6288 down into a number of stages. The first part addresses the technical
6289 process of creating a releasable tar ball. The later stages address the
6290 process of releasing that tar ball.
6291
6292 When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
6293
6294 @subsection Create a release candidate
6295
6296 The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
6297 made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
6298 candidate).
6299
6300 @subsubheading Freeze the branch
6301
6302 Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
6303 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com}.
6304
6305 @subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
6306
6307 @smallexample
6308 $ b=gdb_5_2-branch
6309 $ v=5.2
6310 $ t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
6311 $ echo $t/$b/$v
6312 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6313 $ mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
6314 $ cd $t/$b/$v
6315 $ pwd
6316 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6317 $ which autoconf
6318 /home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
6319 $
6320 @end smallexample
6321
6322 @noindent
6323 Notes:
6324
6325 @itemize @bullet
6326 @item
6327 Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully. You want to be using the
6328 version taken from the @file{binutils} snapshot directory, which can be
6329 found at @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/binutils/}. It is very
6330 unlikely that a system installed version of @code{autoconf} (e.g.,
6331 @file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
6332 @end itemize
6333
6334 @subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
6335
6336 @smallexample
6337 $ for m in gdb insight
6338 do
6339 ( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
6340 done
6341 $
6342 @end smallexample
6343
6344 @noindent
6345 Note:
6346
6347 @itemize @bullet
6348 @item
6349 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
6350 any confusion between what is written here and what your local
6351 @code{cvs} really does.
6352 @end itemize
6353
6354 @subsubheading Update relevant files.
6355
6356 @table @file
6357
6358 @item gdb/NEWS
6359
6360 Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline. Minor
6361 releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
6362
6363 Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
6364
6365 @smallexample
6366 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
6367 ...
6368 c-x 4 a
6369 ...
6370 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6371 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
6372 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6373 @end smallexample
6374
6375 @item gdb/README
6376
6377 You'll need to update:
6378
6379 @itemize @bullet
6380 @item
6381 The version.
6382 @item
6383 The update date.
6384 @item
6385 Who did it.
6386 @end itemize
6387
6388 @smallexample
6389 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
6390 ...
6391 c-x 4 a
6392 ...
6393 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6394 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
6395 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6396 @end smallexample
6397
6398 @emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
6399 before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
6400 to get it updated.}
6401
6402 @emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
6403 @file{INSTALL} from the core documentation. This might be worth
6404 pursuing.}
6405
6406 @item gdb/version.in
6407
6408 @smallexample
6409 $ echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6410 $ cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6411 5.2
6412 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6413 ...
6414 c-x 4 a
6415 ... Bump to version ...
6416 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6417 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
6418 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6419 @end smallexample
6420
6421 @end table
6422
6423 @subsubheading Do the dirty work
6424
6425 This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
6426
6427 @smallexample
6428 $ for m in gdb insight
6429 do
6430 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
6431 done
6432 @end smallexample
6433
6434 If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
6435 (@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
6436
6437 @smallexample
6438 $ for m in gdb insight
6439 do
6440 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
6441 done
6442 @end smallexample
6443
6444 @subsubheading Check the source files
6445
6446 You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
6447 @kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't. Watch out
6448 for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
6449
6450 @smallexample
6451 $ ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
6452 M djunpack.bat
6453 ? gdb-5.1.91.tar
6454 ? proto-toplev
6455 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6456 M gdb/ChangeLog
6457 M gdb/NEWS
6458 M gdb/README
6459 M gdb/version.in
6460 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6461 $
6462 @end smallexample
6463
6464 @noindent
6465 @emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
6466 @file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}. They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
6467 was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
6468 didn't get suppressed). Fixing it would be nice though.}
6469
6470 @subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
6471
6472 @smallexample
6473 $ cp */src/*.tar .
6474 $ cp */src/*.bz2 .
6475 $ ls -F
6476 gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
6477 $ for m in gdb insight
6478 do
6479 bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
6480 gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
6481 done
6482 $
6483 @end smallexample
6484
6485 @noindent
6486 Note:
6487
6488 @itemize @bullet
6489 @item
6490 A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
6491 in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
6492 can not include it in the compressed file. This is also why the release
6493 process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
6494 @end itemize
6495
6496 @subsection Sanity check the tar ball
6497
6498 Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
6499
6500 @smallexample
6501 $ bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
6502 $ cd gdb-5.2
6503 $ ./configure
6504 $ make
6505 @dots{}
6506 $ ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
6507 GNU gdb 5.2
6508 @dots{}
6509 (gdb) b main
6510 Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
6511 (gdb) run
6512 Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
6513
6514 Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
6515 734 catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
6516 (gdb) print args
6517 $1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
6518 (gdb)
6519 @end smallexample
6520
6521 @subsection Make a release candidate available
6522
6523 If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
6524
6525 @enumerate
6526 @item
6527 Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
6528 @item
6529 Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
6530 @var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
6531 process can restart.
6532 @item
6533 Make the release candidate available in
6534 @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
6535 @item
6536 Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com} and
6537 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com} that the candidate is available.
6538 @end enumerate
6539
6540 @subsection Make a formal release available
6541
6542 (And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
6543
6544 @subsubheading Install on sware
6545
6546 Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
6547
6548 @smallexample
6549 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
6550 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6551 @end smallexample
6552
6553 @noindent
6554 Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
6555 are available (e.g. keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
6556
6557 @smallexample
6558 $ cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6559 $ rm @dots{}
6560 @end smallexample
6561
6562 @noindent
6563 Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
6564 directory:
6565
6566 @smallexample
6567 $ vi README
6568 @dots{}
6569 $ rm -f .message
6570 $ ln README .message
6571 @end smallexample
6572
6573 @subsubheading Update the web pages.
6574
6575 @table @file
6576
6577 @item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
6578 This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
6579 @itemize @bullet
6580 @item
6581 General announcement.
6582 @item
6583 News. If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
6584 earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
6585 @item
6586 Errata.
6587 @end itemize
6588
6589 @item htdocs/index.html
6590 @itemx htdocs/news/index.html
6591 @itemx htdocs/download/index.html
6592 These files include:
6593 @itemize @bullet
6594 @item
6595 Announcement of the most recent release.
6596 @item
6597 News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
6598 @end itemize
6599 These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
6600
6601 @item download/onlinedocs/
6602 You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
6603 docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}. The best way is to look in the output
6604 from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
6605 Something like:
6606
6607 @smallexample
6608 $ ~/ss/update-web-docs \
6609 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6610 $PWD/www \
6611 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
6612 gdb
6613 @end smallexample
6614
6615 @item download/ari/
6616 Just like the online documentation. Something like:
6617
6618 @smallexample
6619 $ /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
6620 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6621 $PWD/www \
6622 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
6623 gdb
6624 @end smallexample
6625
6626 @end table
6627
6628 @subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
6629
6630 Something goes here.
6631
6632
6633 @subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
6634
6635 At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
6636 @file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
6637
6638 @subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
6639
6640 Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
6641
6642 @itemize @bullet
6643 @item
6644 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6645 @item
6646 @email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
6647 day or so to let things get out)
6648 @item
6649 @email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
6650 @end itemize
6651
6652 @subsection Cleanup
6653
6654 The release is out but you're still not finished.
6655
6656 @subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
6657
6658 In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
6659
6660 @itemize @bullet
6661 @item
6662 @file{gdb/ChangeLog}
6663 @item
6664 @file{gdb/version.in}
6665 @item
6666 @file{gdb/NEWS}
6667 @item
6668 @file{gdb/README}
6669 @end itemize
6670
6671 @subsubheading Tag the release
6672
6673 Something like:
6674
6675 @smallexample
6676 $ d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6677 $ echo $d
6678 2002-01-24
6679 $ ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
6680 $ ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
6681 @end smallexample
6682
6683 Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
6684 @value{GDBN}.
6685
6686 @subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
6687
6688 Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
6689 indicates when the release was made.
6690
6691 @subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
6692
6693 If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
6694 @kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it. Having
6695 committed all the release changes it can be set to
6696 @file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
6697 is important - it affects the snapshot process).
6698
6699 Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
6700
6701 @subsubheading Merge into trunk
6702
6703 The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
6704 trunk.
6705
6706 @subsubheading Revise the release schedule
6707
6708 Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB
6709 Discussion List} with an updated announcement. The schedule can be
6710 generated by running:
6711
6712 @smallexample
6713 $ ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
6714 @end smallexample
6715
6716 @noindent
6717 The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
6718 of the most recent release.
6719
6720 Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
6721
6722 @section Post release
6723
6724 Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
6725
6726 @node Testsuite
6727
6728 @chapter Testsuite
6729 @cindex test suite
6730
6731 The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
6732 While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
6733 this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
6734 the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
6735 to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
6736
6737 The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework. The
6738 tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
6739 runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
6740
6741 @section Using the Testsuite
6742
6743 @cindex running the test suite
6744 To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
6745 testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}. This just sets up some
6746 environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script. While
6747 the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
6748 and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails. When the testsuite is
6749 finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
6750
6751 @smallexample
6752 === gdb Summary ===
6753
6754 # of expected passes 6016
6755 # of unexpected failures 58
6756 # of unexpected successes 5
6757 # of expected failures 183
6758 # of unresolved testcases 3
6759 # of untested testcases 5
6760 @end smallexample
6761
6762 To run a specific test script, type:
6763 @example
6764 make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
6765 @end example
6766 where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
6767 spaces.
6768
6769 The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
6770 conspires to keep us from this ideal. Unexpected failures indicate
6771 real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite. Expected
6772 failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
6773 hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
6774 everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
6775 being fixed in the near future. Expected failures should not be added
6776 lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
6777 Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
6778 reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
6779 catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
6780 program.
6781
6782 When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
6783 testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
6784 regressions. Note that truly complete testing would require that you
6785 run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
6786 compilers; however this is more than really necessary. In many cases
6787 testing with a single configuration is sufficient. Other useful
6788 options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
6789 host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
6790 mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
6791
6792 If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
6793 tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
6794 and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
6795 Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
6796 failure, please add a test case for it. Some cases are extremely
6797 difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
6798 in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
6799 tests for all of those.
6800
6801 DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines. However,
6802 some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
6803 the host machine are not the same. In such an environment, these scripts
6804 will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
6805
6806 @smallexample
6807 UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
6808 @end smallexample
6809
6810 @section Testsuite Organization
6811
6812 @cindex test suite organization
6813 The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}. While the
6814 testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
6815 and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
6816 handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run. The file
6817 @file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
6818 all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
6819 configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
6820 definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
6821
6822 The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
6823 subdirectories of those. The names of the test files must always end
6824 with @file{.exp}. DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
6825 in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
6826 get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
6827
6828 The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
6829 are for. Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
6830 located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
6831 execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
6832 intelligibility.
6833
6834 @table @file
6835 @item gdb.base
6836 This is the base testsuite. The tests in it should apply to all
6837 configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
6838 The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
6839 ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
6840 for prototypes).
6841
6842 @item gdb.@var{lang}
6843 Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C. Examples are
6844 @file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
6845
6846 @item gdb.@var{platform}
6847 Non-portable tests. The tests are specific to a specific configuration
6848 (host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos. Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
6849 HP-UX.
6850
6851 @item gdb.@var{compiler}
6852 Tests specific to a particular compiler. As of this writing (June
6853 1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
6854 couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
6855 imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
6856 extensions.
6857
6858 @item gdb.@var{subsystem}
6859 Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth. For
6860 instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
6861 @file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
6862 @end table
6863
6864 @section Writing Tests
6865 @cindex writing tests
6866
6867 In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
6868 should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
6869
6870 You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
6871 includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
6872 However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
6873 instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
6874 calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
6875
6876 Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
6877 necessary. Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
6878 a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}. Like @code{gdb_test},
6879 @code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
6880 prompts.
6881
6882 Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
6883 On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
6884 spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
6885
6886 The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
6887 style. Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
6888 styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
6889 instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
6890 never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
6891 uniformly.
6892
6893 @node Hints
6894
6895 @chapter Hints
6896
6897 Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
6898 appear anywhere else in the directory.
6899
6900 @menu
6901 * Getting Started:: Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
6902 * Debugging GDB:: Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
6903 @end menu
6904
6905 @node Getting Started,,, Hints
6906
6907 @section Getting Started
6908
6909 @value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
6910 work on it, it can be hard to know where to start. Fortunately, if you
6911 know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
6912
6913 This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
6914 generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
6915
6916 Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
6917 comments with those functions or data structures. If you run across a
6918 function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
6919 explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
6920 free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
6921 out what the comment should say. If you find a comment which is
6922 actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
6923
6924 Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
6925 native dependent files can be in several places. Sometimes they are
6926 repeated every place the macro is defined. Sometimes they are where the
6927 macro is used. Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
6928 default definition of the macro, and the comment is there. This manual
6929 also documents all the available macros.
6930 @c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
6931 @c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
6932 @c Conditionals})
6933
6934 Start with the header files. Once you have some idea of how
6935 @value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
6936 @file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
6937 code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
6938
6939 You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
6940 enhance your understanding of it. Summarize it, translate it to another
6941 language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
6942 the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
6943 and verify your prediction, etc. If you are reading code and your eyes
6944 are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
6945 approach.
6946
6947 Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
6948 specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
6949 function with the @code{next} command. Do not use @code{step} or you
6950 will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
6951 calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
6952 (perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
6953 called) of what it does. This way you can identify which of the
6954 functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
6955 one which you are interested in. You may need to examine the data
6956 structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
6957 the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
6958 look like.
6959
6960 Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
6961 code, rather than actually stepping through it. The same general
6962 principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
6963 else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
6964 rather than worrying about all its details.
6965
6966 @cindex command implementation
6967 A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
6968 a command which invokes that feature. Suppose you want to know how
6969 single-stepping works. As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
6970 @code{step} command invokes single-stepping. The command is invoked
6971 via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
6972 which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
6973 the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
6974 @code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}. For example, the @code{step}
6975 command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
6976 display} command invokes @code{display_info}. When this convention is
6977 not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
6978 tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
6979 breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
6980
6981 @cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
6982 If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
6983 on @code{bug-gdb}. But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
6984 wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
6985 @value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
6986 Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
6987
6988 @node Debugging GDB,,,Hints
6989
6990 @section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
6991 @cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
6992
6993 If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
6994 fully functional. Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
6995 Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
6996 debugged in another. Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
6997 ./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
6998 @file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
6999
7000 When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
7001 @file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
7002 gdb easier. The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
7003 in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
7004 gdb. See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
7005
7006 If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
7007 you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
7008 routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
7009 @kbd{M-.}
7010
7011 Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
7012 have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
7013
7014 @section Submitting Patches
7015
7016 @cindex submitting patches
7017 Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
7018 @value{GDBN} users. In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
7019 Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
7020 changes.
7021
7022 The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
7023 This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
7024
7025 If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
7026 or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
7027 with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
7028
7029 @cindex legal papers for code contributions
7030 The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
7031 copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
7032 of the changes to the Free Software Foundation. You can get the
7033 standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
7034 and asking for it. We recommend that people write in "All programs
7035 owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
7036 changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
7037 etc) can be
7038 contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
7039 bureaucracy and filed with the FSF. We can't start merging changes until
7040 this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7041 since we maintain it for them).
7042
7043 Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
7044 feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
7045 Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
7046 header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
7047 each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
7048 needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
7049 @file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}). If there are a lot of changes for a
7050 single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
7051
7052 In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
7053 sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
7054 If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one. If you leave
7055 out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting. Etc., etc.
7056
7057 The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
7058 install some of the changes. They'll be returned to you with questions
7059 or comments. If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
7060 will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
7061 The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
7062 the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
7063 being reworked. If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
7064 tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
7065 the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
7066 acceptable.
7067
7068 If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is. But we get a lot
7069 of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
7070 installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
7071 reporter or the contributor could have done. Patches that arrive
7072 complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
7073 they arrive. The others go into a queue and get installed as time
7074 permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
7075 be for quite some time.
7076
7077 Please send patches directly to
7078 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
7079
7080 @section Obsolete Conditionals
7081 @cindex obsolete code
7082
7083 Fragments of old code in @value{GDBN} sometimes reference or set the following
7084 configuration macros. They should not be used by new code, and old uses
7085 should be removed as those parts of the debugger are otherwise touched.
7086
7087 @table @code
7088 @item STACK_END_ADDR
7089 This macro used to define where the end of the stack appeared, for use
7090 in interpreting core file formats that don't record this address in the
7091 core file itself. This information is now configured in BFD, and @value{GDBN}
7092 gets the info portably from there. The values in @value{GDBN}'s configuration
7093 files should be moved into BFD configuration files (if needed there),
7094 and deleted from all of @value{GDBN}'s config files.
7095
7096 Any @file{@var{foo}-xdep.c} file that references STACK_END_ADDR
7097 is so old that it has never been converted to use BFD. Now that's old!
7098
7099 @end table
7100
7101 @include observer.texi
7102 @raisesections
7103 @include fdl.texi
7104 @lowersections
7105
7106 @node Index
7107 @unnumbered Index
7108
7109 @printindex cp
7110
7111 @bye
This page took 0.176677 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.